WO2016175623A1 - Apparatus and method for using codebook wireless communication system - Google Patents

Apparatus and method for using codebook wireless communication system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016175623A1
WO2016175623A1 PCT/KR2016/004566 KR2016004566W WO2016175623A1 WO 2016175623 A1 WO2016175623 A1 WO 2016175623A1 KR 2016004566 W KR2016004566 W KR 2016004566W WO 2016175623 A1 WO2016175623 A1 WO 2016175623A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
codebook
parameter
rank
dimension
beams
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/KR2016/004566
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Md. Saifur RAHMAN
Young-Han Nam
Youngwoo KWAK
Hoondong NOH
Eko Onggosanusi
Original Assignee
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US14/995,126 external-priority patent/US9806781B2/en
Application filed by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. filed Critical Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Priority to CN201680032837.1A priority Critical patent/CN107690756B/en
Priority to EP16786809.0A priority patent/EP3289696A4/en
Publication of WO2016175623A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016175623A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • H04B7/0478Special codebook structures directed to feedback optimisation
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • H04B7/0478Special codebook structures directed to feedback optimisation
    • H04B7/0479Special codebook structures directed to feedback optimisation for multi-dimensional arrays, e.g. horizontal or vertical pre-distortion matrix index [PMI]

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates generally to wireless communication system, specifically to apparatus and method for using a codebook associated with a two dimensional transmit antenna array.
  • the 5G or pre-5G communication system is also called a ‘Beyond 4G Network’ or a ‘Post LTE System’.
  • the 5G communication system is considered to be implemented in higher frequency (mmWave) bands, e.g., 60GHz bands, so as to accomplish higher data rates.
  • mmWave e.g., 60GHz bands
  • MIMO massive multiple-input multiple-output
  • FD-MIMO Full Dimensional MIMO
  • array antenna an analog beam forming, large scale antenna techniques are discussed in 5G communication systems.
  • RANs Cloud Radio Access Networks
  • D2D device-to-device
  • wireless backhaul moving network
  • cooperative communication Coordinated Multi-Points (CoMP), reception-end interference cancellation and the like.
  • CoMP Coordinated Multi-Points
  • FQAM Hybrid Frequency Shift Keying and Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
  • SWSC sliding window superposition coding
  • ACM advanced coding modulation
  • FBMC filter bank multi carrier
  • NOMA non-orthogonal multiple access
  • SCMA sparse code multiple access
  • a method for operating a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system comprises receiving, from a base station, downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook, and transmitting, to the base station, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters.
  • the parameters comprises a first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension, a second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension, a third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension, and a fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
  • a method for operating a base station in a wireless communication system comprises transmitting, to a UE, downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook, and receiving, from the UE, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters.
  • the parameters comprises first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension, second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension, third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension, and fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
  • an apparatus of a UE in a wireless communication system comprises a transceiver, and a controller operatively coupled with transceiver.
  • the controller is configured to receive, from a base station, downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook, and transmit, to the base station, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters.
  • the parameters comprises a first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension, a second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension, a third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension, and a fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
  • an apparatus of a base station comprises a storage unit configured to store information associated with precoding, and a transceiver.
  • the transceiver is configured to transmit, to a user equipment (UE), downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook, and receive, from the UE, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters.
  • the parameters comprises first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension, second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension, third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension, and fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
  • FIGURE 1 illustrates an example wireless network according to this disclosure
  • FIGURES 2A and 2B illustrate example wireless transmit and receive paths according to this disclosure
  • FIGURE 3A illustrates an example user equipment according to this disclosure
  • FIGURE 3B illustrates an example enhanced NodeB (eNB) according to this disclosure
  • FIGURE 4 illustrates logical port to antenna port mapping 400 that may be employed within the wireless communication system according to some embodiments of the current disclosure
  • FIGURES 5A to 5D illustrate antenna configurations and antenna numberings according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 6 illustrates a precoding weight application to antenna configurations of FIGURES 5A to 5D for Numbering scheme 1;
  • FIGURE 7 illustrates a 4x4 dual-polarized antenna array 700 with antenna port (AP) indexing 1;
  • FIGURE 8 is a 4x4 dual-polarized antenna array 800 with antenna port indexing (AP) indexing 2;
  • FIGURE 9 illustrates another numbering of TX antenna elements 900 (or TXRU(transceiver unit)) according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 10 illustrates a beam grouping scheme corresponding to Scheme 1 in TABLE 1 according to embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 11 illustrates a beam grouping scheme corresponding to Scheme 2 in TABLE 1 according to the embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 12 illustrates a beam grouping scheme 1200 corresponding to Scheme 3 in TABLE 1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 13 illustrates a new codebook construction 1300 according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 14 illustrates another new codebook construction according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 16 shows example beam patterns according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 17 illustrates an alternate codebook construction in which two different vertical beams may be applied for the two polarizations according to the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 18 illustrates PUCCH mode 1-1 submode 1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 19 illustrates an example UE elevation angle distribution in cellular wireless systems, in urban macro (UMa) and urban micro (UMi) cases;
  • FIGURES 20 to 22 illustrate three examples of PUCCH mode 1-1 submode 1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURES 23 illustrates an example of PUCCH mode 1-1 submode x according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURES 24 to 26 illustrates respective beam grouping schemes 1, 2 and 3 according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 28 illustrates the subset restriction on rank-1 i1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 29 illustrates the example beam groups in the master codebook after subset restriction according to the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 30 illustrates the subset restriction 300 on rank-1 i2 according to the embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 31 illustrates a flowchart 3100 for UE operation for configuring parametrized codebook 3100 according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 32 illustrates a flowchart of the overall eNB and UE operation according to the parameterized codebook according to the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 33 illustrates an example beam group type in which beams are adjacent in both dimensions according to the present disclosure
  • FIGURES 34A and 34B illustrate another example beam group types in which a beam group consists of orthogonal beam pairs in the first (horizontal) dimension, and adjacent beams in the second (vertical) dimension;
  • FIGURE 35 illustrates alternative rank-1 beam grouping schemes according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 36 illustrate a beam combination to construct rank-2 master codebook according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 37 illustrates rank-2 beam grouping schemes for rank-2 i2 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 38 illustrates a beam combination to construct rank-3 and rank-4 master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 39 illustrates grouping schemes for rank-3 and rank-4 i2 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 40 illustrates a beam combination to construct rank 5 - 8 beam combination master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 41 illustrates grouping schemes for rank 5-8 i2 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 42 illustrate a beam combination to construct a master codebook for rank-2 beam combinations according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 43 illustrates rank-2 beam grouping schemes according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 44 illustrates beam grouping schemes for rank-3 and rank-4 i2 according to the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 45 illustrates a beam combination to construct ranks 5 - 8 master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 46 illustrates beam grouping schemes for ranks 5-8 i2 indices according to the embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 47 illustrates beam grouping scheme or codebook subset selection on rank-2 i2 indices in terms of parameters L1 and L2, according to the embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 48 illustrates rank 3 and rank 4 beam grouping schemes according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 49 illustrates ranks 5 to 8 beam grouping schemes according to the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 50 illustrates the master rank-2 codebook designed according to Design 1 according to the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 51 illustrates the master rank-2 codebook designed according to Design 2 according to embodiments of the present disclosure
  • FIGURE 52 illustrates beam grouping options for Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4 according to the present disclosure.
  • FIGURE 53 illustrates rank 2 beam pairs based on nested property with rank 1 beam according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • FIGURES 1 through 53 discussed below, and the various embodiments used to describe the principles of the present disclosure in this patent document are by way of illustration only and should not be construed in any way to limit the scope of the disclosure. Those skilled in the art will understand that the principles of the present disclosure may be implemented in any suitably arranged wireless communication system.
  • the present disclosure describes apparatus and method for using a codebook in a wireless communication system.
  • 3GPP LTE 3rd Generation Partnership Project Long Term Evolution
  • 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) TS 36.211, “E-UTRA, Physical channels and modulation”, Release-12; (2) 3GPP TS 36.212, “E-UTRA, Multiplexing and channel coding”, Release-12; and (3) 3GPP TS 36.213, “E-UTRA, Physical layer procedures”, Release-12.
  • 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
  • FIGURE 1 illustrates an example wireless network 100 according to this disclosure.
  • the embodiment of the wireless network 100 shown in FIGURE 1 is for illustration only. Other embodiments of the wireless network 100 could be used without departing from the scope of this disclosure.
  • the wireless network 100 includes an eNodeB (eNB) 101, an eNB 102, and an eNB 103.
  • the eNB 101 communicates with the eNB 102 and the eNB 103.
  • the eNB 101 also communicates with at least one Internet Protocol (IP) network 130, such as the Internet, a proprietary IP network, or other data network.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • eNodeB eNodeB
  • base station eNodeB
  • access point eNodeB
  • eNodeB and eNB are used in this patent document to refer to network infrastructure components that provide wireless access to remote terminals.
  • UE user equipment
  • mobile station such as a mobile telephone or smartphone
  • remote wireless equipment such as a wireless personal area network
  • stationary device such as a desktop computer or vending machine
  • the eNB 102 provides wireless broadband access to the network 130 for a first plurality of user equipments (UEs) within a coverage area 120 of the eNB 102.
  • the first plurality of UEs includes a UE 111, which may be located in a small business (SB); a UE 112, which may be located in an enterprise (E); a UE 113, which may be located in a WiFi hotspot (HS); a UE 114, which may be located in a first residence (R); a UE 115, which may be located in a second residence (R); and a UE 116, which may be a mobile device (M) like a cell phone, a wireless laptop, a wireless PDA, or the like.
  • M mobile device
  • the eNB 103 provides wireless broadband access to the network 130 for a second plurality of UEs within a coverage area 125 of the eNB 103.
  • the second plurality of UEs includes the UE 115 and the UE 116.
  • one or more of the eNBs 101-103 may communicate with each other and with the UEs 111-116 using 5G, long-term evolution (LTE), LTE-A, WiMAX, or other advanced wireless communication techniques.
  • LTE long-term evolution
  • LTE-A long-term evolution
  • WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • Dotted lines show the approximate extents of the coverage areas 120 and 125, which are shown as approximately circular for the purposes of illustration and explanation only. It should be clearly understood that the coverage areas associated with eNBs, such as the coverage areas 120 and 125, may have other shapes, including irregular shapes, depending upon the configuration of the eNBs and variations in the radio environment associated with natural and man-made obstructions.
  • one or more of BS 101, BS 102 and BS 103 include 2D antenna arrays as described in embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • one or more of BS 101, BS 102 and BS 103 support the codebook design and structure for systems having 2D antenna arrays.
  • FIGURE 1 illustrates one example of a wireless network 100
  • the wireless network 100 could include any number of eNBs and any number of UEs in any suitable arrangement.
  • the eNB 101 could communicate directly with any number of UEs and provide those UEs with wireless broadband access to the network 130.
  • each eNB 102-103 could communicate directly with the network 130 and provide UEs with direct wireless broadband access to the network 130.
  • the eNB 101, 102, and/or 103 could provide access to other or additional external networks, such as external telephone networks or other types of data networks.
  • FIGURES 2A and 2B illustrate example wireless transmit and receive paths according to this disclosure.
  • a transmit path 200 may be described as being implemented in an eNB (such as eNB 102), while a receive path 250 may be described as being implemented in a UE (such as UE 116).
  • the receive path 250 could be implemented in an eNB and that the transmit path 200 could be implemented in a UE.
  • the receive path 250 is configured to support the codebook design and structure for systems having 2D antenna arrays as described in embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the transmit path 200 includes a channel coding and modulation block 205, a serial-to-parallel (S-to-P) block 210, a size N Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) block 215, a parallel-to-serial (P-to-S) block 220, an add cyclic prefix block 225, and an up-converter (UC) 230.
  • S-to-P serial-to-parallel
  • IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
  • P-to-S parallel-to-serial
  • UC up-converter
  • the receive path 250 includes a down-converter (DC) 255, a remove cyclic prefix block 260, a serial-to-parallel (S-to-P) block 265, a size N Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) block 270, a parallel-to-serial (P-to-S) block 275, and a channel decoding and demodulation block 280.
  • DC down-converter
  • S-to-P serial-to-parallel
  • FFT Fast Fourier Transform
  • P-to-S parallel-to-serial
  • the channel coding and modulation block 205 receives a set of information bits, applies coding (such as a low-density parity check (LDPC) coding), and modulates the input bits (such as with Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) or Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)) to generate a sequence of frequency-domain modulation symbols.
  • coding such as a low-density parity check (LDPC) coding
  • modulates the input bits such as with Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) or Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)
  • QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
  • QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
  • the serial-to-parallel block 210 converts (such as de-multiplexes) the serial modulated symbols to parallel data in order to generate N parallel symbol streams, where N is the IFFT/FFT size used in the eNB 102 and the UE 116.
  • the size N IFFT block 215 performs an IFFT operation on the N parallel symbol streams to generate time-domain output signals.
  • the parallel-to-serial block 220 converts (such as multiplexes) the parallel time-domain output symbols from the size N IFFT block 215 in order to generate a serial time-domain signal.
  • the add cyclic prefix block 225 inserts a cyclic prefix to the time-domain signal.
  • the up-converter 230 modulates (such as up-converts) the output of the add cyclic prefix block 225 to an RF frequency for transmission via a wireless channel.
  • the signal may also be filtered at baseband before conversion to the RF frequency.
  • a transmitted RF signal from the eNB 102 arrives at the UE 116 after passing through the wireless channel, and reverse operations to those at the eNB 102 are performed at the UE 116.
  • the down-converter 255 down-converts the received signal to a baseband frequency
  • the remove cyclic prefix block 260 removes the cyclic prefix to generate a serial time-domain baseband signal.
  • the serial-to-parallel block 265 converts the time-domain baseband signal to parallel time domain signals.
  • the size N FFT block 270 performs an FFT algorithm to generate N parallel frequency-domain signals.
  • the parallel-to-serial block 275 converts the parallel frequency-domain signals to a sequence of modulated data symbols.
  • the channel decoding and demodulation block 280 demodulates and decodes the modulated symbols to recover the original input data stream.
  • Each of the eNBs 101-103 may implement a transmit path 200 that is analogous to transmitting in the downlink to UEs 111-116 and may implement a receive path 250 that is analogous to receiving in the uplink from UEs 111-116.
  • each of UEs 111-116 may implement a transmit path 200 for transmitting in the uplink to eNBs 101-103 and may implement a receive path 250 for receiving in the downlink from eNBs 101-103.
  • FIGURES 2A and 2B can be implemented using only hardware or using a combination of hardware and software/firmware.
  • at least some of the components in FIGURES 2A and 2B may be implemented in software, while other components may be implemented by configurable hardware or a mixture of software and configurable hardware.
  • the FFT block 270 and the IFFT block 215 may be implemented as configurable software algorithms, where the value of size N may be modified according to the implementation.
  • variable N may be any integer number (such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or the like) for DFT and IDFT functions, while the value of the variable N may be any integer number that is a power of two (such as 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or the like) for FFT and IFFT functions.
  • FIGURES 2A and 2B illustrate examples of wireless transmit and receive paths
  • various changes may be made to FIGURES 2A and 2B.
  • various components in FIGURES 2A and 2B could be combined, further subdivided, or omitted and additional components could be added according to particular needs.
  • FIGURES 2A and 2B are meant to illustrate examples of the types of transmit and receive paths that could be used in a wireless network. Any other suitable architectures could be used to support wireless communications in a wireless network.
  • FIGURE 3A illustrates an example UE 116 according to this disclosure.
  • the embodiment of the UE 116 illustrated in FIGURE 3A is for illustration only, and the UEs 111-115 of FIGURE 1 could have the same or similar configuration.
  • UEs come in a wide variety of configurations, and FIGURE 3A does not limit the scope of this disclosure to any particular implementation of a UE.
  • the UE 116 includes an antenna 305, a radio frequency (RF) transceiver 310, transmit (TX) processing circuitry 315, a microphone 320, and receive (RX) processing circuitry 325.
  • the UE 116 also includes a speaker 330, a main processor 340, an input/output (I/O) interface (IF) 345, a keypad 350, a display 355, and a memory 360.
  • the memory 360 includes a basic operating system (OS) program 361 and one or more applications 362.
  • OS basic operating system
  • the RF transceiver 310 receives, from the antenna 305, an incoming RF signal transmitted by an eNB of the network 100.
  • the RF transceiver 310 down-converts the incoming RF signal to generate an intermediate frequency (IF) or baseband signal.
  • the IF or baseband signal is sent to the RX processing circuitry 325, which generates a processed baseband signal by filtering, decoding, and/or digitizing the baseband or IF signal.
  • the RX processing circuitry 325 transmits the processed baseband signal to the speaker 330 (such as for voice data) or to the main processor 340 for further processing (such as for web browsing data).
  • the TX processing circuitry 315 receives analog or digital voice data from the microphone 320 or other outgoing baseband data (such as web data, e-mail, or interactive video game data) from the main processor 340.
  • the TX processing circuitry 315 encodes, multiplexes, and/or digitizes the outgoing baseband data to generate a processed baseband or IF signal.
  • the RF transceiver 310 receives the outgoing processed baseband or IF signal from the TX processing circuitry 315 and up-converts the baseband or IF signal to an RF signal that is transmitted via the antenna 305.
  • the main processor 340 can include one or more processors or other processing devices and execute the basic OS program 361 stored in the memory 360 in order to control the overall operation of the UE 116.
  • the main processor 340 could control the reception of forward channel signals and the transmission of reverse channel signals by the RF transceiver 310, the RX processing circuitry 325, and the TX processing circuitry 315 in accordance with well-known principles.
  • the main processor 340 includes at least one microprocessor or microcontroller.
  • the main processor 340 is also capable of executing other processes and programs resident in the memory 360, such as operations for channel quality measurement and reporting for systems having 2D antenna arrays as described in embodiments of the present disclosure as described in embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the main processor 340 can move data into or out of the memory 360 as required by an executing process.
  • the main processor 340 is configured to execute the applications 362 based on the OS program 361 or in response to signals received from eNBs or an operator.
  • the main processor 340 is also coupled to the I/O interface 345, which provides the UE 116 with the ability to connect to other devices such as laptop computers and handheld computers.
  • the I/O interface 345 is the communication path between these accessories and the main controller 340.
  • the main processor 340 is also coupled to the keypad 350 and the display unit 355.
  • the operator of the UE 116 can use the keypad 350 to enter data into the UE 116.
  • the display 355 may be a liquid crystal display or other display capable of rendering text and/or at least limited graphics, such as from web sites.
  • the memory 360 is coupled to the main processor 340.
  • Part of the memory 360 could include a random access memory (RAM), and another part of the memory 360 could include a Flash memory or other read-only memory (ROM).
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • FIGURE 3A illustrates one example of UE 116
  • various changes may be made to FIGURE 3A.
  • various components in FIGURE 3A could be combined, further subdivided, or omitted and additional components could be added according to particular needs.
  • the main processor 340 could be divided into multiple processors, such as one or more central processing units (CPUs) and one or more graphics processing units (GPUs).
  • FIGURE 3A illustrates the UE 116 configured as a mobile telephone or smartphone, UEs could be configured to operate as other types of mobile or stationary devices.
  • FIGURE 3B illustrates an example eNB 102 according to this disclosure.
  • the embodiment of the eNB 102 shown in FIGURE 3B is for illustration only, and other eNBs of FIGURE 1 could have the same or similar configuration.
  • eNBs come in a wide variety of configurations, and FIGURE 3B does not limit the scope of this disclosure to any particular implementation of an eNB.
  • eNB 101 and eNB 103 can include the same or similar structure as eNB 102.
  • the eNB 102 includes multiple antennas 370a-370n, multiple RF transceivers 372a-372n, transmit (TX) processing circuitry 374, and receive (RX) processing circuitry 376.
  • the multiple antennas 370a-370n include 2D antenna arrays.
  • the eNB 102 also includes a controller/processor 378, a memory 380, and a backhaul or network interface 382.
  • the RF transceivers 372a-372n receive, from the antennas 370a-370n, incoming RF signals, such as signals transmitted by UEs or other eNBs.
  • the RF transceivers 372a-372n down-convert the incoming RF signals to generate IF or baseband signals.
  • the IF or baseband signals are sent to the RX processing circuitry 376, which generates processed baseband signals by filtering, decoding, and/or digitizing the baseband or IF signals.
  • the RX processing circuitry 376 transmits the processed baseband signals to the controller/ processor 378 for further processing.
  • the TX processing circuitry 374 receives analog or digital data (such as voice data, web data, e-mail, or interactive video game data) from the controller/processor 378.
  • the TX processing circuitry 374 encodes, multiplexes, and/or digitizes the outgoing baseband data to generate processed baseband or IF signals.
  • the RF transceivers 372a-372n receive the outgoing processed baseband or IF signals from the TX processing circuitry 374 and up-converts the baseband or IF signals to RF signals that are transmitted via the antennas 370a-370n.
  • the controller/processor 378 can include one or more processors or other processing devices that control the overall operation of the eNB 102.
  • the controller/processor 378 could control the reception of forward channel signals and the transmission of reverse channel signals by the RF transceivers 372a-372n, the RX processing circuitry 376, and the TX processing circuitry 324 in accordance with well-known principles.
  • the controller/processor 378 could support additional functions as well, such as more advanced wireless communication functions.
  • the controller/processor 378 can perform the blind interference sensing (BIS) process, such as performed by a BIS algorithm, and decodes the received signal subtracted by the interfering signals. Any of a wide variety of other functions could be supported in the eNB 102 by the controller/processor 378.
  • the controller/ processor 378 includes at least one microprocessor or microcontroller.
  • the controller/processor 378 is also capable of executing programs and other processes resident in the memory 380, such as a basic OS.
  • the controller/processor 378 is also capable of supporting channel quality measurement and reporting for systems having 2D antenna arrays as described in embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the controller/processor 378 supports communications between entities, such as web RTC.
  • the controller/processor 378 can move data into or out of the memory 380 as required by an executing process.
  • the controller/processor 378 is also coupled to the backhaul or network interface 335.
  • the backhaul or network interface 382 allows the eNB 102 to communicate with other devices or systems over a backhaul connection or over a network.
  • the interface 382 could support communications over any suitable wired or wireless connection(s). For example, when the eNB 102 is implemented as part of a cellular communication system (such as one supporting 5G, LTE, or LTE-A), the interface 382 could allow the eNB 102 to communicate with other eNBs over a wired or wireless backhaul connection.
  • the interface 382 could allow the eNB 102 to communicate over a wired or wireless local area network or over a wired or wireless connection to a larger network (such as the Internet).
  • the interface 382 includes any suitable structure supporting communications over a wired or wireless connection, such as an Ethernet or RF transceiver.
  • the memory 380 is coupled to the controller/processor 325.
  • Part of the memory 330 could include a RAM, and another part of the memory 380 could include a Flash memory or other ROM.
  • a plurality of instructions, such as a BIS algorithm is stored in memory. The plurality of instructions are configured to cause the controller/processor 378 to perform the BIS process and to decode a received signal after subtracting out at least one interfering signal determined by the BIS algorithm.
  • the transmit and receive paths of the eNB 102 (implemented using the RF transceivers 372a-372n, TX processing circuitry 374, and/or RX processing circuitry 376) support communication with aggregation of FDD cells and TDD cells.
  • FIGURE 3B illustrates one example of an eNB 102
  • the eNB 102 could include any number of each component shown in FIGURE 3.
  • an access point could include a number of interfaces 382, and the controller/processor 378 could support routing functions to route data between different network addresses.
  • the eNB 102 while shown as including a single instance of TX processing circuitry 374 and a single instance of RX processing circuitry 376, the eNB 102 could include multiple instances of each (such as one per RF transceiver).
  • a wireless environment for a Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) system For supporting a MIMO system, a user equipment (UE) and a base station in the present disclosure may use a precoding scheme which divides uplink information and downlink information to each of antennas appropriately according to channel state.
  • MIMO Multiple-Input Multiple-Output
  • the UE and the base station may use a precoding scheme based on codebook information for precoding.
  • the UE and the base station may determine beforehand a set of precoding matrices.
  • the UE may determine a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) indicating a certain precoding matrix in the set of precoding matrices by using information associated with channel state between the base station.
  • the UE may transmit the PMI to the base station.
  • the base station may share the certain precoding matrix with the UE.
  • the UE has been described as a receiver, and the base station has been described as a transmitter, but it is not limited to such description. So, the UE may be described as a transmitter, and the base station may be described as a receiver.
  • a codebook for two, four, or eight antenna ports or a codebook for a one-dimensional layout.
  • various codebook schemes are required.
  • the UE and the base station in the present disclosure may share a codebook for eight, twelve, and sixteen antenna ports in full dimensional MIMO (FD-MIMO) with each other.
  • FD-MIMO full dimensional MIMO
  • FIGURE 4 illustrates logical port to antenna port mapping 400 that may be employed within the wireless communication system according to some embodiments of the current disclosure.
  • the embodiment of the port mapping illustrated in FIGURE 4 is for illustration only. However, port mappings come in a wide variety of configurations, and FIGURE 4 does not limit the scope of this disclosure to any particular implementation of a port mapping.
  • FIGURE 4 illustrates logical port to antenna port mapping, according to some embodiments of the current disclosure.
  • Tx signals on each logical port is fed into an antenna virtualization matrix (e.g., of a size Mx1), output signals of which are fed into a set of M physical antenna ports.
  • M corresponds to a total number or quantity of antenna elements on a substantially vertical axis.
  • S corresponds to a number of virtual antenna ports or a number of logical ports.
  • M corresponds to a ratio of a total number or quantity of antenna elements to S, on a substantially vertical axis, wherein M and S are chosen to be a positive integer.
  • Each element in logical ports may be mapped to each antenna element by using a precoding matrix.
  • Signals on logical ports may be represented as a vector of size S x 1.
  • Signals received from antenna ports may be represented as a vector of size M x 1.
  • the precoding matrix may be represented as a vector of size M x S.
  • the number of rows in the precoding matrix equals to the number of the antenna ports
  • the number of columns in the precoding matrix equals to the number of the logical ports.
  • the number of logical ports corresponds to the number of layers.
  • the number of layers may be referred a rank. For example, if the number of antenna ports is four and the number of transport layers is two, a size of the precoding matrix is 4 x 2 and the ranks is two.
  • a structure of two-dimensional codebook may be described.
  • the total number or the quantity of antenna elements on a substantially vertical axis corresponds to one of two dimensions.
  • N V is referred as the number of antenna elements in a dimension for vertical direction.
  • Other of the two dimensions is a dimension for horizontal direction.
  • N H is referred as the number of antenna elements in the dimension for horizontal direction.
  • a codebook in the present disclosure is a codebook determined based on N V and N H .
  • FIGURES 5A to 5D illustrate antenna configurations and antenna numberings according to one embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiments shown in FIGURES 5A to 5D are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • a cross pol (or X-pol) antenna array is considered, in which a pair of antenna elements in a same physical location are polarized in two distinct angles, e.g., +45 degrees and -45 degrees.
  • FIGURES 5A and 5B are antenna configurations with 16 Channel State Information - Reference Signal (CSI-RS) ports, comprising 8 pairs of x-pol antenna elements placed in a 2D antenna panel. The 8 pairs can be placed in 2x4 (FIGURE 5A) or 4x2 manner (FIGURE 5B) on horizontal and vertical dimensions.
  • CSI-RS Channel State Information - Reference Signal
  • FIGURES 5C and 5D are antenna configurations with 12 CSI-RS ports, comprising 6 pairs of x-pol antenna elements placed in a 2D antenna panel. The 6 pairs can be placed in 2x3 (FIGURE 5C) or 3x2 manner (FIGURE 5D) on horizontal and vertical dimensions.
  • antennas are indexed with integer numbers, 0, 1, ..., 15 for 16-port configurations (FIGURES 5A and 5B), and 0, ..., 11 for 12-port configurations (FIGURES 5C and 5D).
  • FIGURE 5A illustrates configuration A in 16-port
  • FIGURE 5B illustrates configuration B in 16-port
  • FIGURE 5C illustrates configuration A in 12-port
  • FIGURE 5D illustrates configuration B in 12-port.
  • antenna numbers are assigned as follows. Consecutive numbers are assigned for all the antenna elements for a first polarization, and proceed to a second polarization.
  • the first polarization and the second polarization indicates each element in cross (X) pols.
  • the first polarization is described as a pole tilted to a right side by 45 degrees
  • the second polarization is described as a pole tilted a left side by 45 degrees, but various embodiments are not limited in the description.
  • Numbering scheme 1 consecutive numbers are assigned for a first row with progressing one edge to another edge, and proceed to a second row; and Numbering scheme 2: consecutive numbers are assigned for a first column with progressing one edge to another edge, and proceed to a second column.
  • antenna numbers 0-7 are assigned for a first polarization, and 8-15 are assigned for a second polarization; and antenna numbers 0-3 are assigned for a first row and 4-7 are assigned for a second row.
  • Antenna numbers in tall arrays are obtained by simply rotating the wide antenna arrays (such as 12-port config A and 16-port config A) by 90 degrees.
  • a precoder codebook using a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) matrix is preferred in cross (X) pols shown in FIGURE 5.
  • DFT Discrete Fourier Transform
  • a UE when a UE is configure with 12 or 16 port CSI-RS for a CSI-RS resource, the UE is configured to report a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) feedback precoder according to the antenna numbers in FIGURES 5A to 5D.
  • PMI Precoding Matrix Indicator
  • a rank-1 precoder, W m,n,p which is an N CSIRS x1 vector, to be reported by the UE has the following form:
  • example set of oversampling factors that can be configured for S N and S M are ⁇ 2,4,8 ⁇ ; and m, m' ⁇ ⁇ 0,1,..., S M M ⁇ , and n, n' ⁇ ⁇ 0,1,..., S N N ⁇ .
  • FIGURE 6 illustrates a precoding weight application to antenna configurations of FIGURES 5A to 5D for numbering scheme 1.
  • An oversampling factor may be referred as an oversampling rate.
  • the oversampling factor is an oversampling factor for DFT.
  • Equation 1 may represent Kronecker product.
  • the equation 1 may be expressed by using v m,n , instead of in the equation 1.
  • the equation 1 is expressed as following:
  • u n is a 4x1 vector representing a horizontal DFT beam and v m is a 2x1 vector representing a vertical DFT beam.
  • v m is a 2x1 vector representing a horizontal DFT beam.
  • v m can be written as .
  • u n With 16-port configurations, u n can be written as:
  • u n With 12-port configurations, u n can be written as:
  • Precoding weights to be applied to antenna port numbers 0 through 3 are u n , and the precoding weights to be applied to antenna ports 4 through 7 are with an appropriate power normalization factor.
  • precoding weights to be applied to antenna port numbers 8 through 11 are u n'
  • the precoding weights to be applied to antenna ports 12 through 15 are with an appropriate power normalization factor.
  • This method of precoding weight application for Numbering scheme 1 is illustrated in FIGURES 5A to 5D. Note that the method is also applicable to Numbering scheme 2.
  • FIGURE 7 illustrates a 4x4 dual-polarized antenna array 700 with antenna port (AP) indexing 1 and FIGURE 8 is the same 4x4 dual-polarized antenna array 800 with antenna port indexing (AP) indexing 2.
  • each labelled antenna element is logically mapped onto a single antenna port.
  • one antenna port can correspond to multiple antenna elements (physical antennas) combined via a virtualization.
  • the vertical dimension (consisting of 4 rows) facilitates elevation beamforming in addition to the azimuthal beamforming across the horizontal dimension (consisting of 4 columns of dual polarized antennas).
  • An antenna array 700 may be numbered according to indexing 1.
  • the antenna array 700 may be numbered in a horizontal direction for a certain polarization.
  • the antenna array 700 may be numbered by changing a row after a fourth column of the antenna array 700 is numbered.
  • the antenna array 700 may be numbered for another polarization in a first row after an antenna of a second row and a fourth column in the antenna array 700 is numbered. After all antennas of the second row are numbered, a third row and a fourth row may be numbered as this way for the first row and the second row.
  • An Antenna array 800 may be numbered according to indexing 2.
  • the antenna array 800 nay be numbered in a vertical direction for a certain polarization.
  • the antenna array 800 may be numbered by changing a row after a fourth column of the antenna array 800 is numbered. After all antennas for a certain polarization in the antenna array 800 is numbered, antennas for another polarization in the antenna array 800 may be numbered in the same way.
  • Embodiments shown in FIGURE 7 and FIGURE 8 are for illustration only. Another indexing scheme may be used for numbering antennas.
  • MIMO precoding in Rel.12 LTE standardization was largely designed to offer a precoding gain for one-dimensional antenna array. While fixed beamforming (i.e. antenna virtualization) can be implemented across the elevation dimension, it is unable to reap the potential gain offered by the spatial and frequency selective nature of the channel.
  • FIGURE 9 illustrates another numbering of TX antenna elements 900 (or TXRU(transceiver unit) according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 9 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • TXRU 2D rectangular antenna array
  • a TXRU can be associated with multiple antenna elements.
  • an antenna array comprising a column with a same polarization of a 2D rectangular array is partitioned into M groups of consecutive elements, and the M groups correspond to the M TXRUs in a column with a same polarization in the TXRU array in FIGURE 9.
  • (M,N) is sometimes denoted as (N H , N V ) or (N 1 , N 2 ) .
  • REs resource elements
  • PRBs Physical Resource Blocks
  • the number of polarization is two. If (M, N) is expressed as (N 1 , N 2 ), the number of CSI-RS ports may be expressed 2 ⁇ N 1 ⁇ N 2 .
  • a UE is configured with a CSI-RS configuration via higher layer, configuring Q antenna ports - antenna ports A(1) through A(Q).
  • the UE is further configured with CSI reporting configuration via higher layer in association with the CSI-RS configuration.
  • the UE reports Channel State Information (CSI) to the base station.
  • the CSI indicates information associated with a quality of a wireless link or a wireless channel formed between the UE and the base station.
  • the CSI may comprise a rank indicator (RI), a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI).
  • the RI indicates information associated with a rank for channel, and represents the number of streams received by the UE through a resource.
  • the PMI is a value reflected spatial characteristic for the channel, and indicates an index of precoder that the UE prefers.
  • the CQI is a value indicating a strength of the channel. If the base station uses the PMI, the CQI may be represent Signal-to-Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) of received signals.
  • SINR Signal-to-Interference plus Noise Ratio
  • the CSI reporting configuration includes information element (IE) indicating the CSI-RS decomposition information or component PMI port configuration.
  • M corresponds to the number of TXRUs in the first dimension
  • N corresponds to the number of TXRUs in the second dimension.
  • M ⁇ P corresponds to N 1
  • N corresponds to N 2
  • N ⁇ P corresponds to N 1
  • M corresponds to N 2.
  • Another example method of indicating the PMI reporting decomposition is to explicitly configure Q and N 1 , and implicitly configure N 2 .
  • Another example method of indicating the PMI reporting decomposition is to explicitly configure N 1 and N 2 , and implicitly configure Q.
  • Another example method of indicating the PMI reporting decomposition is to explicitly configure M, N, and P, and implicitly configure Q.
  • the UE calculates CQI with a composite precoder constructed with two-component codebooks, N 1 -Tx codebook (codebook 1) and N 2 -Tx codebook (codebook 2).
  • N 1 -Tx codebook codebook 1
  • N 2 -Tx codebook codebook 2
  • W 1 and W 2 are respectively are precoders of codebook 1 and codebook 2
  • PMI reporting is configured, the UE will report at least two component PMI corresponding to selected pair of W 1 and W 2 .
  • W 1 or W 2 is further decomposed according to the double codebook structure.
  • W 1 is further decomposed into:
  • v m is an m-th DFT vector out of a (N 1 /2)-Tx DFT codebook with oversampling factor o 1 , and is a co-phase. Furthermore, the index m, m', n determines the precoder W 1.
  • W 1 is further decomposed into:
  • v m is an m-th DFT vector out of a 4-Tx DFT codebook with oversampling factor 8; and . Furthermore, with one transmission layer, CQI will be derived with precoder ; and with two transmission layer, CQI will be derived with precoder .
  • both W 1 and W 2 are further decomposed according to the double codebook structure with two stages.
  • the first stage codebook is used to represent WB (Wide-Band) and long-term channel
  • the second stage codebook is used to represent SB (Sub-Band) and short-term channel.
  • uniformly-spaced beams are consecutively-spaced beams.
  • a beam grouping scheme is defined in terms of two groups of parameters, one group per dimension.
  • a group of parameters for dimension d comprises at least one of the following parameters: a number of antenna ports N d ; an oversampling factor o d ; a skip number s d ; a beam offset number f d ; and a number of beams L d .
  • a beam group indicated by a first PMI i 1,d of dimension d is determined based upon these five parameters.
  • L d beams are referred to as a beam group in dimension d.
  • a UE may be configured via higher layers (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC)) with at least one of these five parameters, wherein a subset of parameters not configured in the same configuration may have been pre-configured at the UE.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the beams in the beam group indicated by the first PMI of the first dimension, i 1,1 is:
  • the beams in the beam group indicated by the first PMI of the second dimension, i 1,2 is:
  • a UE is configured via higher layers with two numbers of beams, L 1 and L 2 respectively for the first and the second dimension in an RRC configuration, who is also pre-configured with all the other parameters.
  • the beams in the beam group indicated by the first PMI of the first dimension, i 1,1 is:
  • the beams in the beam group indicated by the first PMI of the second dimension, i 1,2 is:
  • Three illustrative beam grouping schemes, referred to as Scheme 1, Scheme 2, and Scheme 3, according to the double codebook structure are shown in FIGURES 10, 11 and 12, and the related parameters are listed in TABLE 1.
  • FIGURES 10 to 12 illustrate these 16 ⁇ 32 3D beams constructed by Kronecker product of each beam vector in codebook and each beam vector in codebook as a 16 ⁇ 32 grid, wherein the 16 ⁇ 32 grid comprises 16 ⁇ 32 squares elements. Each square element corresponds to each beam.
  • FIGURE 10 illustrates a beam grouping scheme corresponding to Scheme 1 in TABLE 1 according to embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 10 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • a first, a second, and a third beam groups are illustrated.
  • FIGURE 11 illustrates a beam grouping scheme 1100 corresponding to Scheme 2 in TABLE 1 according to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 11 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • 16x8 128 beam groups are constructed.
  • FIGURE 12 illustrates a beam grouping scheme 1200 corresponding to Scheme 3 in TABLE 1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 12 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • a first, a second, and a third beam groups are illustrated.
  • the PMI feedback payload to indicate PMI indices for the three schemes is shown in below TABLE 2. Both WB and SB components of the feedback overhead can be decomposed into two, one for azimuth and the other for elevation.
  • WB components in all three schemes, a 4-bit feedback is needed to report azimuth component of the PMI index (H-PMI) corresponding to .
  • H-PMI the PMI index
  • V-PMI is configured as a WB component
  • V-PMI is reported as a 4 bit information, which corresponds to . Otherwise no WB V-PMI is reported (i.e., 0 bits for ).
  • V-PMI is reported as a 3-bit information, which corresponds to .
  • SB components in all three schemes, a 2-bit feedback is needed to report the co-phase value.
  • H-PMI azimuth component of the PMI index
  • V-PMI elevation component of the PMI index
  • a 4-bit indication is used in Scheme 1 if SB V-PMI is configured, and a 1-bit feedback is used in Schemes 2 and 3.
  • the UE is configured with one first-stage codebook selected from multiple candidate first-stage codebooks, in which each first stage codebook is associated with a set of parameters defining a single beam grouping scheme such as Schemes 1, 2, and 3 in TABLE 1.
  • a beam grouping scheme may be configured via higher-layers (e.g, RRC) according to the below; or a preferred beam grouping scheme may be reported by the UE.
  • the UE is configured with one first-stage codebook selected from multiple candidate first-stage codebooks where each first stage codebook is associated with multiple beam grouping schemes wherein example beam grouping schemes are shown in TABLE 1.
  • the UE can more flexibly select SB PMI.
  • a UE may be configured to report a first PMI based upon the first-stage codebook, comprising beam groups constructed by Schemes 1 and 2.
  • a new information element (IE) that can be configured in the higher-layer (e.g., RRC) can be designed as shown below, which indicates which of schemes 1, 2 and 3 are used for constructing beam groups for first stage codebook construction.
  • a UE may report a one-bit selected beam group index information, as well as the first PMIi 1,1 and i 1,2 for the two dimensions; in this case, the first PMI is interpreted differently according to the reported beam group index.
  • a UE is configured with a CSI-RS configuration via higher layer, configuring two resources, wherein a first resource is used for CSI-RS transmissions of N 1 antenna ports - antenna ports A(1) through A(N 1 ), and a second resource is used for CSI-RS transmissions of N 2 antenna ports - antenna ports B(1) through B(N 2 ).
  • the UE calculates CQI with a composite precoder constructed with two-component codebooks, N 1 -Tx codebook (codebook 1) and N 2 -Tx codebook (codebook 2).
  • N 1 -Tx codebook codebook 1
  • N 2 -Tx codebook codebook 2
  • W 1 and W 2 are respectively are precoders of codebook 1 and codebook 2
  • the signals formed with the composite precoder is assumed to be transmitted on antenna ports C(1), ..., C(P) for the purpose of deriving CQI index.
  • the UE may also assume that reference signals on antenna ports C(1), ..., C(P) are constructed by a Kronecker product of reference signals on A(1), ..., A(N 1 ) and reference signals on B(1), ..., B(N 2 ).
  • [C(1), ..., C(P)] t [A(1), ..., A(N 1 )] t [B(1), ..., B(N 2 )] t .
  • the UE may assume the following:
  • the corresponding PDSCH signals transmitted on antenna ports ⁇ 15...14+P ⁇ would have a ratio of EPRE to CSI-RS Energy Per Resource Element (EPRE) equal to the ratio given in subclause 3GPP TS 36.213.
  • a codebook is defined for antenna port number 15 to 22 or antenna port number 15 to 26 or antenna port number 15 to 30. In other words, the codebook is defined for 8, 12, or 16 antenna ports. In other embodiments, a codebook is defined for antenna port number 15 to 14 + P. P may be a positive integer. In other words, the codebook is defined for P antenna ports.
  • TABLE 3 and TABLE 4 are codebooks for rank-1 and rank-2 (1-layer and 2-layer) CSI reporting for UEs configured with 8 Tx antenna port transmissions.
  • a CW CodeWord
  • two indices, i.e., i 1 and i 2 have to be selected.
  • i 1 and i 2 the following two variables are used:
  • RI 2
  • m, m' and n are derived with the two indices i 1 and i 2 according to TABLE 4, resulting in a rank-2 precoder, . It is noted that is constructed such that it can be used for two different types of channel conditions that facilitate a rank-2 transmission.
  • These rank-2 precoders are likely to be used for those UEs that can receive strong signals along two orthogonal channels generated by the two differently polarized antennas.
  • FIGURE 13 illustrates a new codebook construction 1300 according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 13 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the channels are quantized with two indices i 1,1 and i 2,1 , according to the 8-Tx double codebook.
  • the antenna (TXRU) numbering system in this example is aligned with FIGURE 5A.
  • a co-phasing vector to apply for the two rows is constructed with a new index k, and is equal to .
  • the resulting precoders and when the most recently reported RI is 1 and 2 are:
  • precoders when the most recently reported RI is > 2 can also be similarly constructed with applying a co-phasing vector.
  • rank-1 and rank-2 precoders are constructed as:
  • rank-1 and rank-2 precoders are constructed as:
  • FIGURE 14 illustrates another new codebook construction according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 14 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the codebook construction is the same as FIGURE 13, except for the second column of the composite 16-Tx rank-2 precoder.
  • the rank-2 precoder matrix is:
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 15 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the codebook is constructed under the same principle as FIGURE 13.
  • the rank-1 and rank-2 precoder is constructed as:
  • the figure shows that the elevation angle range of 90° to 115° are well-covered, the range of which corresponds to typical user elevation angle distribution.
  • FIGURE 17 illustrates an alternate codebook construction 1700 in which two different vertical beams may be applied for the two polarizations according to the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 17 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • Two co-phasing vectors or vertical beams to apply for the two rows are constructed with two new indices k 1 and k 2 , and are equal to and .
  • the first vertical beam is applied to antenna ports with one polarization, shown as solid lines, and the second vertical beam is applied to antenna ports with other polarization, shown as dashed lines.
  • rank 2 RI
  • the resulting precoders and when the most recently reported RI is 1 and 2 are:
  • precoders when the most recently reported RI is > 2 can also be similarly constructed with applying two vertical co-phasing vectors.
  • rank-1 and rank-2 precoders are constructed as:
  • rank-1 and rank-2 precoders are constructed as:
  • a UE can be configured to report three PMI indices, i 1 , i 2 , and i 3 , for informing eNB of m, m', n, k, used for constructing a precoder according to a codebook construction associated with FIGURE 13 or FIGURE 14 or FIGURE 15.
  • FIGURE 18 illustrates PUCCH mode 1-1 submode 1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 18 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • a UE is configured with PUCCH feedback mode 1-1 submode 1. Then, the UE reports RI, i 1 and i 3 in RI reporting instances, and the UE reports i 2 and corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances. This is illustrated in FIGURE 18, where i 1 , i 2 and i 3 are denoted as W1, W2 and W3.
  • i 1 and i 3 it is proposed to uniformly subsample i 1 with sampling factor 4, but not to subsample i 3 , in order to maintain the elevation beamforming gain.
  • FIGURE 19 illustrates an UE elevation angle distribution in cellular wireless systems, in urban macro (UMa) and urban micro (UMi) cases.
  • the elevation angle ( ) is defined in such a way that to the zenith is zero degree, and to the horizon is 90 degrees.
  • base station serves UEs below the base station antennas, in which case the elevation angle is 90 degrees or larger.
  • precoders [1 1] and [1 j] are most frequently chosen, each of which respectively corresponds to an elevation angle of 90 degrees and an angle between 90 degrees and 180 degrees.
  • a UE reports a codebook index out of a subsampled set.
  • the subsampled set corresponds to , so that UE can recommend one of the two precoders separated farthest in the angular domain.
  • This method can improve MU-MIMO throughput, when eNB receives PMI constructed according to this method and applies the recommended precoders in the MU-MIMO transmissions.
  • the subsampled set is higher-layer configured, e.g., between and .
  • a UE can be configured to report three PMI indices, i 1 , i 2 , and i 3 , for informing eNB of m, m', n, k, used for constructing a precoder according to a codebook construction associated with FIGURE 13 or FIGURE 14 or FIGURE 15.
  • FIGURES 20 to 22 illustrate three examples of PUCCH mode 1-1 submode 1 2000, 2100, and 2200 according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiments shown in FIGURES 20 to 22 are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • a UE is configured with PUCCH feedback mode 1-1 submode 1. Then, the UE reports RI and i 1 in RI reporting instances, and the UE reports i 2 , i 3 , and corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances. This is illustrated in FIGURE 20, where i 1 , i 2 and i 3 are denoted as W1, W2 and W3.
  • a UE can be configured to report four PMI indices, i 1,1 , i 2,1 , i 1,2 , and i 2,2 corresponding to codebooks , , , and , respectively according to some embodiments of this disclosure.
  • the eNB uses them for constructing a precoder according to a codebook construction associated with FIGURE 13 or FIGURE 14 or FIGURE 15, where index k is derived from i 1,2 and i 2,2 .
  • a UE is configured with PUCCH feedback mode 1-1 submode 1. Then, the UE reports RI and (i 1 , i 3 ) in RI reporting instances, and the UE reports (i 2 , i 4 ), and corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances. This is illustrated in FIGURE 21, where i 1 , i 2 , i 3 , and i 4 are denoted as W1, W2, W3 and W4.
  • a UE is configured with PUCCH feedback mode 1-1 submode 1. Then, the UE reports RI and (i 1,1 , i 1,2 ) in RI reporting instances, and the UE reports (i 2,1 , i 2,2 ), and i 2,1 alternatively together with the corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances. Note that in this mode, if the number of feedback bits in PMI/CQI reporting instances is fixed, then the UE can report a course and a fine PMI feedback for W2: W2 reported together with W4 is a course feedback and W2 reported alone is a refined feedback. This is illustrated in FIGURE 22, where i 1,1 , i 2,1 , i 1,2 , and i 2,2 are denoted as W1, W2, W3 and W4.
  • i 2,1 indicates one out of 4 horizontal beams and i 2,2 indicates one out of 2 vertical beams (for example Scheme 2 in).
  • total number of feedback bits in PMI/CQI reporting instances is 4, of which 2 bits are used for co-phase selection and the remaining two bits are used for selecting a composite beam, constructed by Kronecker product of a horizontal beam vector and a vertical beam vector.
  • the subsampled set corresponds to beam indices ⁇ 1,2 ⁇ out of four horizontal beam indices ⁇ 1,2,3,4 ⁇ indicated by i 1 .
  • the subsampled set corresponds to beam indices ⁇ 1,3 ⁇ out of four horizontal beam indices ⁇ 1,2,3,4 ⁇ indicated by i 1 .
  • a subsampling method may be indicated according to TABLE 9.
  • eNB may configure the UE a subsampling method for deriving i 2 .
  • the UE may feedback a selected subsampling method using a 1-bit filed. Such feedback may be WB and long-term.
  • a UE is configured with PUCCH feedback mode 1-1 submode x, as shown in FIGURE 23, for reporting i 1,1 , i 2,1 , i 1,2 , and i 2,2 using two CSI processes: CSI processes 1 and 2.
  • CSI processes 1 the UE reports RI and i 1,1 in RI reporting instances, and it reports i 2,1 and the corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances.
  • CSI processes 2 the UE reports RI and i 1,2 in RI reporting instances, and it reports i 2,2 and the corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances.
  • the two RIs and CQIs in the CSI reports correspond to the joint RI and joint CQI.
  • one of them for example CSI report 1 includes joint RI and joint CQI, and the other report includes V-RI and V-CQI, for example.
  • both or one of RI and CQI are reported only once in one of the CSI reports.
  • a UE is configured with a CSI-RS configuration via higher layer, configuring Q antenna ports - antenna ports A(1) through A(Q).
  • the UE is further configured with CSI reporting configuration via higher layer in association with the CSI-RS configuration.
  • the CSI reporting configuration includes information element (IE) indicating the CSI-RS decomposition information (or component PMI port configuration).
  • the first dimension may correspond to the horizontal direction or columns
  • the first dimension may correspond to the vertical direction or rows
  • downlink signaling may indicate first and second quantities of antenna ports. These first and second quantities of antenna ports indicate respective quantities of antenna ports in first and second dimensions.
  • the first quantity of antenna ports is a number or value for antenna ports in a first dimension.
  • the first dimension may be a vertical direction or rows or may be the horizontal direction or columns.
  • the second quantity of antenna ports is a number or value for antenna ports in a second dimension.
  • the second dimension may be a vertical direction or rows or may be the horizontal direction or columns.
  • the first and second quantities of subset beams indicates respective quantities of subset beams in first and second dimensions.
  • the first quantity of subset beams is a number or value for subset beams in a first dimension.
  • a precoding matrix W in the codebook is represented as:
  • a first alternative to construct such a codebook is as follows. Tall, [square] and wide arrays are supported with a single codebook for each of 8, 12 and 16 CSI-RS ports: For PUSCH and PUCCH reporting, a codebook subset can be separately selected via RRC signaling of codebook subset selection parameters or a bitmap; FFS beam subset selection/restriction and related mechanism; and FFS which and how the parameters (in TABLE 1) are related/configured.
  • a second alternative to construct such a codebook is as follows. Tall, square and wide port layouts are supported with parameters N 1 , N 2 : Values of N 1 and N 2 are RRC signaled.
  • the parameters (in TABLE 10) define the codebook: Configurable oversampling factors, RRC signaled, values FFS; Other parameters are to be determined; FFS beam subset selection/restriction and related mechanism.
  • a beam grouping scheme and a codebook can be defined in terms of two groups of parameters, one group per dimension.
  • a group of parameters for dimension d comprises at least one of the following parameters: a number of antenna ports per pol N d ; an oversampling factor O d ; a skip number (or beam group spacing) s d (for W1); a beam offset number f d ; a beam spacing number p d (for W2); and a number of beams (in each beam group) L d .
  • a beam group indicated by a first PMI i 1,d of dimension d is determined based upon these six parameters.
  • Three illustrative beam grouping schemes, referred to as Scheme 1, Scheme 2, and Scheme 3, according to the double codebook structure are shown in FIGURE 4, FIGURE 5 and FIGURE 6, and the parameters are listed in TABLE 11.
  • the beam grouping schemes may be represented as at least one parameter associated with a codebook configuration.
  • FIGURES 24 to 26 illustrates respective beam grouping schemes 1, 2 and 3 according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiments shown in FIGURES 24 to 26 are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the scheme is determined according to antenna (port) dimension parameters (N 1 , N 2 ), where N 1 and N 2 are configured by the higher layer (i.e. RRC).
  • N 1 and N 2 are configured by the higher layer (i.e. RRC).
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • FIGURES 24 to 26 illustrate these 16 ⁇ 32 3D beams constructed by Kronecker product of each beam vector in codebook and each beam vector in codebook as a 16 ⁇ 32 grid, wherein each square correspond to a beam.
  • the master codebook is a large codebook with default codebook parameters.
  • the master codebook may be unique.
  • An example of multiple master codebooks may be based on beam offset numbers f 1 and f 2 as shown in the table below.
  • a 1-bit indication may be used to indicate the master codebook via higher layer such as RRC.
  • the disclosure is applicable to other values of f 1 and f 2 .
  • the oversampling factor in one or both dimensions is configurable according to the below table.
  • the UE may be configured with one of multiple beam grouping schemes or (L 1 ,L 2 ) value.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 27 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • An example of the master codebook is a fine DFT codebook that is obtained by performing the KP of azimuth (1 st dimension) and elevation (2 nd dimension) DFT codebooks with large oversampling factors.
  • beam groups of a default size are formed.
  • the beam groups are formed based on all possible values of s 1 and s 2 .
  • the set of all beam groups constitutes the master W1 codebook.
  • QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
  • the master sub-codebooks may map to the codebook parameters according to the following TABLE 16.
  • the 1 st dimension beam index m 1 increases first as i 2 increases.
  • the 2 nd dimension beam index m 2 increases first as i 2 increases.
  • the master codebook for other parameters and for more than 1 layer can be similarly constructed.
  • CSI-RS CSI-RS
  • non-precoded CSI-RS CSI-RS
  • the one element with value of one is on (m+1)-th row.
  • the precoding vector obtained with Alt 2 can be applied on the antenna ports numbered according to FIGURES 7 and 8.
  • the first dimension corresponds to a longer dimension of the array; and the second dimension corresponds to a shorter dimension of the array.
  • the precoding vector obtained with Alt 1 can be applied on the antenna ports numbered in such a way that the first dimension corresponds to a shorter dimension of the array; and the second dimension corresponds to a longer dimension of the array.
  • the UE can identify that a configured CSI-RS resource is beamformed or non-precoded by:
  • Explicit RRC indication The UE is configured with a higher-layer parameter for the configured CSI-RS resource, indicating whether the configured CSI-RS resource is beamformed or non-precoded.
  • Implicit indication The UE is configured with a different set of CSI-RS port numbers for beamformed CSI-RS than the non-precoded CSI-RS.
  • the beamformed CSI-RS takes antenna port numbers 200-207, while the non-precoded CSI-RS takes antenna port numbers 15-30.
  • Codebook Subset Restriction is described to reduce complexity for the UE and the codebook.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 28 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • An illustration of subset restriction on rank-1 i 1,1 and i 1,2 indices in terms of parameters s 1 and s 2 is shown in FIGURE 28.
  • the shaded squares represent the rank-1 i 1,1 and i 1,2 indices that are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included.
  • the codebook subset restriction may be applied from a table such as TABLE 21. Depending on the values of L 1 and L 2 , the subset of rank-1 i 2 indices can be obtained from a row of the table.
  • i 2 index before subset restriction and i 2 index after subset restriction are same as 64.
  • (i 1,1 , i 1,2 ) (i 1,H , i 1,V )
  • FIGURE 29 illustrates the example beam groups in the master codebook according to the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 29 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the four rows correspond to four different values for s 1 and s 2 .
  • the first column shows the corresponding 2D index map of i 1,H and i 1,V indices.
  • FIGURE 30 illustrates the subset restriction 300 on rank-1 i 2 according to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 30 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • subset restriction on rank-1 i 2 indices can be differently applied.
  • the master codebook for i 2 comprises 16 beams, spanned by 4x4 beams in the first and the second dimension s.
  • the index h and v in the figure corresponds to i 2,1 and i 2,2 .
  • the shaded squares represent the rank-1 i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included.
  • a UE for each dimension, is configured with beam skipping (i.e., s d ), as illustrated in TABLE 22.
  • Beam skipping i.e., s d
  • s d is a parameter indicating an interval between two groups which are adjacent each other. More specifically, the interval is an interval between leading beam of first beam group and leading beam of second beam group which is adjacent to the first beam group.
  • the two groups comprise the first beam group and the second beam group.
  • a UE for each dimension, is configured with beam spacing (i.e., p d ), as illustrated in TABLE 23.
  • a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )), so that the UE can restrict the beam groups as illustrated in FIGURE 39.
  • the UE is configured with a beam group (i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )) in the higher-layer according to TABLE 24.
  • the motivation for these methods is to support various antenna configurations at the eNB with minimal signaling overhead.
  • This configuration may be applied based on the codebook subset restriction in the form of a bit sequence.
  • the bit sequence may consist of at least two bitmaps, one for i 1,H and i 1,V and the other for i 2 .
  • the antenna ports are numbered according to FIGURES 5A to 5D, in which it is assumed that the first dimension for the PMI corresponds to a longer dimension of the array and the second dimension corresponds to a shorter dimension of the array.
  • Q 16
  • the oversampled DFT vectors for the first dimension, u n are of length 4
  • the oversampled DFT vectors for the second dimension, v m are of length 2.
  • Q 12
  • the DFT vectors for the first dimension are of length 3
  • the DFT vectors for the second dimension are of length 2. In other words, the number of polarization for each case is two.
  • Codebook W is constructed based on W1 and W2.
  • W1 may be constructed according to beam skipping number (s d ) and W2 may be constructed according to beam spacing number (p d ).
  • the first dimension is for the horizontal dimension and the second dimension is for the vertical dimension.
  • the beam spacing p 1 for the first dimension is selected such that a narrowly spaced beams in the first dimension comprise a beam group
  • the beam spacing p 2 for the second dimension is selected such that a widely spaced beams in the second dimension comprise the beam group.
  • the number of bits for the first PMI ( i 1,1 and i 1,2 ) can be correspondingly determined.
  • the range of i 1,1 0,1,...,15 and hence 4 bits are necessary to quantize the information when no codebook subset restriction is applied to this PMI.
  • This configuration is likely to be useful for configuration B (tall array), especially when the column spacing is large, e.g., 4 ⁇ or even 10 ⁇ .
  • the first dimension corresponds to azimuth
  • the second dimension corresponds to elevation. Because the beam angle variation over time and frequency is wide in the azimuth domain and the TXRU HPBW (Half Power Beam Width) in the azimuth domain is also wide (60 degrees), and hence it is likely that widely spaced azimuth beams will provide performance gain.
  • RRC higher layer
  • the information element in TABLE 25 is defined in terms of (M, N, P) in FIGURE 9, the first value corresponding to a wide array may correspond to a configuration with N > M, and the second value corresponding to a tall array may correspond to a configuration with N ⁇ M.
  • Q 16
  • the UE is configured in the higher layer (RRC), which beam skipping the UE has to use to construct for each of i 1,d .
  • RRC higher layer
  • the CSR bitmap can be constructed as in TABLE 26. It is noted that similar CSR bitmap tables can be straightforwardly constructed if other values such as 1 or 8 are also allowed to be configured for s d .
  • the number of bits to be reported for i 1,d changes dependent upon the configured value of s d .
  • the UE is configured in the higher layer (RRC), which beam spacing the UE has to use to construct for i 2 (or each of i 2,1 and i 2,2 ).
  • RRC higher layer
  • the CSR bitmap can be constructed as in TABLE 27. It is noted that similar CSR bitmap tables can be straightforwardly constructed if other values are also allowed to be configured for p d .
  • the CSR bitmap is can be constructed as in TABLE 28.
  • the CSR (L 1 ,L 2 ) (1,4), (4,1) and (2,2) are respectively corresponding to beam grids 1240, 1250 and 1260 in FIGURE 30.
  • the values that can be reported by the UE for i 2,1 and i 2,2 are configured to be restricted according to the table for 1240, 1250 and 1260.
  • master codebooks are alternatively defined as in TABLE 29 and TABLE 30, with fewer elements (32) than its counterparts (64) in TABLE 17 and TABLE 18.
  • TABLE 29 and TABLE 30 may correspond to TABLE 17 and TABLE 18, respectively.
  • the codebook subset restriction can be constructed as in TABLE 31 for 1240, 1250 and 1260.
  • the UE may assume all four co-phase values ⁇ 1,j,-1,-j ⁇ to derive rank-1 i 2 .
  • the UE is further configured to restrict to report PMI, RI and PTI within a precoder codebook subset specified by:
  • the bitmap is configured for each CSI process and each subframe sets (if subframe sets C CSI,0 and C CSI,1 are configured by higher layers) by higher layer signaling.
  • the bitmap can specify all possible precoder codebook subsets from which the UE can assume the eNB may be using when the UE is configured in the relevant transmission mode X.
  • FIGURE 31 illustrates a flowchart 3100 for UE operation for configuring parameterized codebook according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 31 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • step S3103 the UE determines whether to be configured with at least one of beam skipping or beam grouping for a codebook. If the UE determines whether to be configured with the beam skipping or the beam grouping for the codebook, the UE performs next operation in step S3105. On the other hand, if the UE does not determine whether to be configured with the beam skipping or the beam grouping for the codebook, the UE performs next operation in step S3110.
  • step S3105 if the UE is configured with at least one of beam skipping or beam grouping, according to some embodiments on this disclosure, the proposed codebook subset restriction according to some embodiments of this disclosure may be used.
  • step S3110 if the UE is not configured with at least one of beam skipping or beam grouping, the legacy codebook subset restriction may be used.
  • FIGURE 32 illustrates a flowchart 3200 of the overall eNB and UE operation according to the parameterized codebook according to the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 32 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • eNB determines at least one of beam skipping or beam grouping parameters.
  • the eNB determines at least one of beam skipping or beam grouping parameters for configuring parameterized codebook and PMI, RI, CQI calculation with the eNB.
  • step S3210 the eNB determines bit sequence associated with a codebook.
  • the determined bit sequence is communicated to the UE via higher layer signaling such as RRC.
  • the bit sequence may be indicate parameters associated with the codebook.
  • the parameters comprise the number of antennas for a first dimension, the number of antennas for a second dimension, an oversampling rate associated with the first dimension, an oversampling rate associated with the second dimension, and a parameter instructing a codebook configuration.
  • the parameters comprise a parameter associated with subset restriction for a first codebook or a parameter associated with subset restriction for a second codebook.
  • the codebook is determined based on the first codebook and the second codebook.
  • the parameter associated with subset restriction for the first codebook or the parameter associated with subset restriction for the second codebook may be shown in FIGURE 26, or c n , d m , and e k presented in Alt 1, 2, 3 or 4.
  • step S3215 the UE receives the bit sequence for the configured codebook.
  • the UE derives the codebook corresponding to the bit sequence.
  • the codebook is constructed by using DFT matrix or Walsh matrix as precoder matrix. Also, the codebook is constructed in various forms by being combined with phase shift matrix or phase shift diversity matrix.
  • the RI indicates information associated with a rank for channel, and means the number of streams which is received by the UE through a resource.
  • the PMI is a value reflected spatial characteristic, and indicates an index of a precoder which the UE prefers to.
  • the CQI is a value indicating signal strength, may indicate Signal-to-Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) of received signals.
  • SINR Signal-to-Interference plus Noise Ratio
  • the UE derives PMI, RI, and CQI.
  • the UE determines the codebook based on the PMI, RI and CQI.
  • step S3230 the eNB receives the PMI, RI, and CQI from the UE.
  • the UE performs feedback for the PMI, RI, and CQI.
  • a precoder between the eNB and the UE may be shared in this way.
  • FIGURE 33 illustrates an example beam group type 3300 in which beams are adjacent in both dimensions according to the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 33 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the beam groups 0, 1, 2,..., 31 represent beam groups with 2 adjacent beams in horizontal and 2 adjacent beams in vertical dimensions.
  • beam group 0 consists of beams ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ in horizontal and beams ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ in vertical.
  • beam group 31 consists of beams ⁇ 14, 15 ⁇ in horizontal and beams ⁇ 7, 8 ⁇ in vertical. Numbering scheme shown in FIGURE 33 is an example only, does not limit various embodiments.
  • the embodiments shown in FIGURES 34A and 34B are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • Alt 1 3402 as illustrated for the farthest orthogonal beams and Alt 2 3404 for the closest orthogonal beams.
  • the beam groups 0, 1, 2,..., 15 represent beam groups with 2 orthogonal beam pairs in horizontal and 2 adjacent beams in vertical dimensions.
  • beam group 0 consists of beams ⁇ 0,1,8,9 ⁇ in horizontal and beams ⁇ 0,1 ⁇ in vertical. Note that two orthogonal beam pairs are shown as two separated groups.
  • UE is configured with the parameterized KP codebook in which at least one of the codebook parameters (N d , o d , s d , p d , L d , b d ), according to some embodiments of this disclosure, is specific to the number of transmission layers (or rank).
  • a first set of codebook parameters may be the same for both codebooks, and a second set of parameters may be different.
  • the first set of common parameters for rank 1 and 2 codebooks may be (N d , o d , L d , b d ) and the second set of different parameters may be (s d , p d ).
  • s d and p d can be both 1 and 2 for rank 1 codebook, but they are 2 for rank 2 codebook.
  • An example of the two sets is shown below.
  • a first set of codebook parameters may be the same for both codebooks, and a second set of parameters may be different.
  • the first set of common parameters for rank 1 and 2 codebooks may be (N d , o d , L d ,b 2 ) and the second set of different parameters may be (b 1 , s d , p d ).
  • s d and p d can be both 1 and 2 for rank 1 codebook, but they are 2 for rank 2 codebook.
  • An example of the two sets is shown below.
  • parameters related to both first stage and second stage codebooks are rank-specific.
  • both s 1 and s 2 (W1 parameters), and p 1 and p 2 (W2 parameters) may be rank-specific.
  • parameters related to one of the first and second stage codebooks are rank-specific.
  • s 1 and s 2 are the common
  • p 1 and p 2 are rank-specific.
  • the numbering scheme 2 in is assumed.
  • the table for numbering scheme 1 can be constructed similarly.
  • the 1 st dimension beam index m 1 increases first as i 2 increases.
  • the 2 nd dimension beam index m 2 may increase first as i 2 increases.
  • Q is equal to 2N 1 *N 2 .
  • the UE reports i 2,1 , i 2,2 and n in place of i 2 , in which case m 1 and m 2 are determined as:
  • the number of rank-1 i 2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 6 is 32, so 5 bits are needed to report i 2 based on this master codebook.
  • the master codebook for other parameters and for more than 1 layer can be similarly constructed.
  • CSI-RS CSI-RS
  • non-precoded CSI-RS CSI-RS
  • the UE is further configured to use:
  • the UE is further configured to use:
  • the one element with value of one is on (m+1)-th row.
  • the precoding vector obtained with numbering scheme 2 can be applied on the antenna ports.
  • the first dimension corresponds to a longer dimension of the array; and the second dimension corresponds to a shorter dimension of the array.
  • the precoding vector obtained with numbering scheme 1 can be applied on the antenna ports numbered in such a way that the first dimension corresponds to a shorter dimension of the array; and the second dimension corresponds to a longer dimension of the array.
  • the UE can identify that a configured CSI-RS resource is beamformed or non-precoded by:
  • Explicit RRC indication The UE is configured with a higher-layer parameter for the configured CSI-RS resource, indicating whether the configured CSI-RS resource is beamformed or non-precoded;
  • Implicit indication The UE is configured with a different set of CSI-RS port numbers for beamformed CSI-RS than the non-precoded CSI-RS.
  • the beamformed CSI-RS takes antenna port numbers 200-207, while the non-precoded CSI-RS takes antenna port numbers 15-30.
  • FIGURE 35 illustrates alternative rank-1 beam grouping schemes 3500 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiments shown in FIGURE 35 are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • subset restriction on rank-1 i 2 indices can be differently applied.
  • the master codebook for i 2 comprises 8 beams, spanned by 4x2 beams in the first and the second dimensions.
  • the 1 st dim and the 2 nd dim in the figure correspond to i 2,1 and i 2,2 .
  • the shaded (black) squares represent the rank-1 i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
  • the 4 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (0,1), (1,0), (1,1) ⁇ ;
  • the 4 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (0,2), (1,0), (1,2) ⁇ ;
  • the 4 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (0,3), (1,0), (1,3) ⁇ ;
  • the 4 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (0,2), (1,1), (1,3) ⁇ ;
  • the 4 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (0,1), (1,2), (1,3) ⁇ ;
  • the 4 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (0,3), (1,1), (1,2) ⁇ .
  • the 2 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (0,1) ⁇ ;
  • the 2 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (1,1) ⁇ ;
  • the 2 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (2,1) ⁇ ;
  • the 2 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (3,1) ⁇ .
  • the 2 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (1,0) ⁇ ;
  • the 2 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (2,0) ⁇ ;
  • the 2 beams are located at ⁇ (0,0), (3,0) ⁇ .
  • the number of rank-1 i 2 indices with the subset restriction depends on the beam grouping schemes.
  • For the beam grouping schemes 820 - 830 it is 16 (4 ⁇ 4, 4 for the beams and 4 for the co-phase), so 4 bits are needed to report i 2 , for the configured beam grouping scheme from 820 - 830.
  • For the beam grouping schemes 840 - 850 it is 8 (2 ⁇ 4, 2 for the beams and 4 for the co-phase), so 3 bits are needed to report i 2 , for the configured beam grouping scheme from 840 - 850.
  • For the beam grouping scheme 860 it is 4 (1 ⁇ 4, 1 for the beam and 4 for the co-phase), so 2 bits are needed to report i 2 , for the configured beam grouping scheme 860.
  • a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )), so that the UE can restrict the beam groups as illustrated in FIGURE 35.
  • the UE is configured a beam group (i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )) in the higher-layer according to TABLE 36.
  • (L 1 , L 2 ) (2,2), (1,2), and (2,1)
  • one beam grouping scheme out of multiple beam grouping schemes 830 - 850 is explicitly configured.
  • it is fixed to default schemes 830a, 840a, and 850a, for example.
  • a UE in another method, can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 820 - 860 in FIGURE 35.
  • RRC higher-layer
  • the subset of beam grouping schemes is ⁇ 820, 830a, 830d, 860 ⁇ in FIGURE 35, and the UE is configured with one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
  • a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 820 - 860 in FIGURE 35.
  • the subset of beam grouping schemes is ⁇ 820, 830a, 830d, 860 ⁇ in FIGURE 35, and the UE reports one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
  • the motivation for these methods is to support various antenna configurations at the eNB with minimal signaling overhead.
  • This configuration may be applied based on the codebook subset selection in the form of a bit sequence.
  • the bit sequence may consist of at least two bitmaps, one for i 1,H and i 1,V and the other for i 2 . The details of the bitmap are provided later in the disclosure.
  • rank-2 precoder codebook comprises two types of rank-2 precoding matrices:
  • Type 2 Different-beam: the two beams for the two layers are different.
  • two precoders For each selected beam pair for the two layers, two precoders can be constructed with applying two co-phase matrices of and .
  • a rank-2 master codebook can be constructed with these two types of rank-2 precoding matrices.
  • the type 2 precoding matrices are further classified into:
  • Type 2-1 Different-beam in horizontal only: the two beams for the two layers are different for the horizontal component;
  • Type 2-2 Different-beam in vertical only: the two beams for the two layers are different for the vertical component;
  • Type 2-3 Different-beam in both horizontal & vertical: the two beams for the two layers are different for both horizontal and vertical components.
  • Q represents the number of CSI-RS ports.
  • Five variables consist of two parameters associated with the first dimension, two parameters associated with the second dimension, and one parameter associated with a phase.
  • the numbering scheme 2 in FIGURE 5 is assumed.
  • the table for numbering scheme 1 can be constructed similarly.
  • the 1 st dimension beam index m 1 increases first as i 2 increases.
  • the 2 nd dimension beam index m 2 may increase first as i 2 increases.
  • the number of rank-2 i 2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 38 is 32, so 5 bits are needed to report i 2 based on this master codebook.
  • CSI-RS CSI-RS
  • non-precoded CSI-RS CSI-RS
  • DFT vectors of appropriate lengths depending on numbering scheme 1 or 2 as in rank-1 codebook case
  • the UE is configured with only beamformed CSI-RS, then they are unit vectors of appropriate lengths.
  • FIGURE 36 illustrate a beam combination 3600 to construct rank-2 master codebook based on TABLE 37 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 36 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • an 8x2 grid can be considered for the two dimensions as shown in FIGURE 36.
  • beam pair indices (x, y) is selected for the 1 st and 2 nd dimensions, corresponding beam pairs are selected for the longer dimension, according to TABLE 37.
  • the beam index corresponds to the index y.
  • the beam indices m 1 , m 1' , m 2 , m 2' are selected as:
  • m 1 s 1 ⁇ i 1,1 + a 0 ⁇ p 1 ;
  • m 1' s 1 ⁇ i 1,1 + a 1 ⁇ p 1 ;
  • FIGURE 37 illustrates rank-2 beam grouping schemes for rank-2 i 2 3700 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 37 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the 1 st dim and the 2 nd dim in the figure correspond to i 2,1 and i 2,2 .
  • the shaded (black) squares represent the rank-2 i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
  • the number of rank-2 i 2 indices with the subset restriction depends on the beam grouping schemes.
  • the beam grouping schemes 1020 - 1040 it is 16 (8 ⁇ 2, 8 for the beam combinations and 2 for the co-phase), so 4 bits are needed to report i 2 , for the configured beam grouping scheme from 1020 - 1040.
  • the beam grouping schemes 1050 - 1060 it is 8 (4 ⁇ 2, 4 for the beam combinations and 2 for the co-phase), so 3 bits are needed to report i 2 , for the configured beam grouping scheme from 1050 - 1060.
  • the beam grouping scheme 1070 it is 2 (1 ⁇ 2, 1 for the beam and 2 for the co-phase), so 1 bit is needed to report i 2 , for the configured beam grouping scheme 1070.
  • a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )), so that the UE can restrict the rank-2 beam combinations as illustrated in FIGURE 37.
  • the UE is configured a beam group (i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )) in the higher-layer according to TABLE 39.
  • (L 1 , L 2 ) (2,2), (1,2), and (2,1)
  • one beam grouping scheme out of multiple beam grouping schemes is explicitly configured.
  • it is fixed to default beam grouping schemes 1040a, 1050a, and 1060a, for example.
  • a UE in another method, can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 1020 - 1070 in FIGURE 37.
  • RRC higher-layer
  • the subset of beam grouping schemes is ⁇ 1020, 1030, 1040a, 1070 ⁇ in FIGURE 37, and the UE is configured with one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
  • a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 1020 - 1070 in FIGURE 37.
  • the subset of beam grouping schemes is ⁇ 1020, 1030, 1040a, 1070 ⁇ in FIGURE 37, and the UE reports one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
  • numbering scheme 2 is assumed; the method can be straightforwardly modified if numbering scheme 1 is assumed, with placing different u beams on the MIMO layers instead of different v beams in the Kronecker products.
  • rank-3 precoder codebook comprises beam groups with four pairs of orthogonal beams: (0,8), (2,10), (4,12), and (6,14).
  • One orthogonal beam pair (b 0 ,b 1 ) is selected for the three layers and three precoders can be constructed with applying the co-phase matrix of on the tuple (b 0 ,b 0 ,b 1 ) and (b 1 ,b 0 ,b 1 ), and the co-phase matrix of on the tuple (b 0 ,b 1 ,b 1 ) and (b 0 ,b 1 ,b 0 ).
  • the number of rank-2 i 2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 40 is 32, so 5 bits are needed to report i 2 based on this master codebook.
  • rank-4 precoder codebook comprises beam groups with four pairs of orthogonal beams: (0,8), (2,10), (4,12), and (6,14).
  • One orthogonal beam pair (b 0 ,b 1 ) is selected for the four layers and four precoders can be constructed with applying two co-phase matrices of on the tuple (b 0 ,b 1 , b 0 ,b 1 ).
  • the number of rank-4 i 2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 41 is 16, so 4 bits are needed to report i 2 based on this master codebook.
  • FIGURE 38 illustrates beam pairs 3800 to construct rank-3 and rank-4 master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 387 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • an 8x2 grid can be considered for the two dimensions as shown (shaded and pattern squares) in FIGURE 38.
  • the orthogonal beam pair with the leading beam x is selected for the longer dimension and the beam index y is selected for the shorter dimension.
  • FIGURE 39 illustrates grouping schemes 3900 for rank-3 and rank-4 i 2 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 39 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the 1 st dim and the 2 nd dim in the figure corresponds to i 2,1 and i 2,2 .
  • the shaded or pattern squares represent the rank-3 and rank-4 i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
  • only one half i.e., leading beam indices ⁇ 0,2,4,6 ⁇ of the four orthogonal beam pairs
  • the second half is shaded or denoted by pattern in the same way of the first half.
  • the 2 beam combinations are ⁇ (0,0), (2,1) ⁇ ;
  • the 2 beam combinations are ⁇ (0,0), (4,1) ⁇ ;
  • the 2 beam combinations are ⁇ (0,0), (6,1) ⁇ .
  • the number of rank 3-4 i 2 indices with the subset restriction depends on the beam grouping schemes.
  • For the beam grouping schemes 1220 - 1230 it is 16 and 8, respectively for rank 3 and 4. So, 4 bits and 3 bits are needed to report i 2 for each configured beam grouping scheme from 1220 - 1230 for rank-3 and rank-4, respectively.
  • For the beam grouping schemes 1240 - 1250 it is 8 and 4, respectively for rank 3 and 4. So, 3 bits and 2 bits are needed to report i 2 for each configured beam grouping scheme from 1240 - 1250 for rank-3 and rank-4, respectively.
  • For the beam grouping scheme 1260 it is 2 and 1, respectively for rank 3 and 4. So, 1 bits and 0 bit are needed to report i 2 for the configured beam grouping scheme 1260 for rank-3 and rank-4, respectively.
  • a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )), so that the UE can restrict the rank-3 and rank-4 beam combinations as illustrated in FIGURE 39.
  • the UE is configured a beam group (i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )) in the higher-layer according to TABLE 42.
  • (L 1 , L 2 ) (2,2), (1,2), and (2,1)
  • one beam grouping scheme out of multiple beam grouping schemes is explicitly configured.
  • it is fixed to default beam grouping schemes 1230a, 1240a, and 1250a, for example.
  • a UE in another method, can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 1220 - 1260 in FIGURE 39.
  • RRC higher-layer
  • the subset of beam grouping schemes is ⁇ 1220, 1230a, 1260 ⁇ in FIGURE 39, and the UE is configured with one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
  • a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 1220 - 1260 in FIGURE 39.
  • the subset of beam grouping schemes is ⁇ 1220, 1230a, 1260 ⁇ in FIGURE 39, and the UE reports one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
  • the rank-5 and rank-6 precoders can be constructed with applying the co-phase matrix of on the tuple (b 0 , b 0 , b 1 , b 1 , b 2 ) and (b 0 , b 0 , b 1 , b 1 , b 2 , b 2 ), respectively.
  • the rank 7 and rank 8 pre-coders are similarly constructed by including the fourth orthogonal beam 24.
  • they are non-legacy parameters.
  • the number of rank 5 - 8 i 2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 43 is 2, so 1 bit is needed to report i 2 based on this master codebook.
  • FIGURE 40 illustrates beam pairs 4000 to construct rank 5 - 8 beam combination master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 40 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • an 3x2 (4x2) grid can be considered for the two dimensions as shown (shaded squares) in FIGURE 40.
  • FIGURE 41 illustrates grouping schemes 4100 for rank 5-8 i 2 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 41 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the shaded (black) squares represent the rank 5-8 i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
  • the number of i 2 indices (W2 codebook size) of the master codebook and the codebooks that are obtained according to the W2 beam grouping schemes (or after codebook subset selection (CSS)) according to some embodiments of this disclosure can be summarized as in TABLE 44. It can be observed that a reduction of 1 bit in W2 feedback can be achieved with the proposed W2 beam grouping scheme (or CSS) compared to the master codebook.
  • the i 2 indices 0 - 31 are identical to those in TABLE 38 (i.e., rank-2 beam pair Type 1, and Type 2-1).
  • i 2 indices 32 - 47 are corresponding to rank-2 beam pair Type 2-2 and 2-3.
  • FIGURE 42 illustrate a beam combination 4200 to construct a master codebook for rank-2 beam combinations according to TABLE 37 and TABLE 45 according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 42 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • an 8x3 grid can be considered for the two dimensions as shown in FIGURE 42.
  • beam pair indices (x, y) is selected for the 1 st and 2 nd dimensions, corresponding beam pairs are selected for the longer and the shorter dimension, according to TABLE 37 and TABLE 45, respectively.
  • total number of pairs for (x,y) in FIGURE 42 is 24, with applying the two co-phases of ⁇ 1,j ⁇ for , total number of codewords becomes 48.
  • FIGURE 43 illustrates rank-2 beam grouping schemes 4300 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 43 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the 1 st dim and the 2 nd dim in the figure correspond to i 2,1 and i 2,2 .
  • the shaded (black) squares represent the rank-2 i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
  • a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )), so that the UE can restrict the rank-2 beam combinations as illustrated in FIGURE 43 16
  • a UE in another method, can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes in FIGURE 43.
  • RRC higher-layer
  • a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes in FIGURE 43.
  • the beam grouping (or subset restriction) is applied based on the configured rank-2 beam pair type.
  • the UE may be configured by the higher layer signaling about the rank-2 beam pair type according to TABLE 47.
  • TABLE 45 is used for the beam pairs in the shorter dimension to construct the master codebook.
  • the i 2 indices 0 - 31 are identical to those in TABLE 40.
  • the rank-4 table is constructed similarly.
  • FIGURE 44 illustrates beam grouping schemes 4400 for rank-3 and rank-4 i 2 according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiments shown in FIGURE 44 are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the shaded and pattern squares represent the i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
  • a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )), so that the UE can restrict the rank-3 and rank-4 beam combinations as illustrated in FIGURE 44.
  • a UE in another method, can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes in FIGURE 44 17.
  • RRC higher-layer
  • a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes in FIGURE 44.
  • the i 2 indices 0 - 1 are identical to those in TABLE 43.
  • they are non-legacy parameters.
  • the number of rank 5 - 8 i 2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 43 is 3, so 2 bit is needed to report i 2 based on this master codebook.
  • FIGURE 45 illustrates a beam combination 4500 to construct ranks 5 - 8 master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 45 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • an 3x3 (4x3) grid can be considered for the two dimensions as shown (black squares) in FIGURE 45.
  • FIGURE 46 illustrates beam grouping schemes for ranks 5-8 i 2 indices according to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 46 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the shaded (black) squares represent the rank 5-8 i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
  • TABLE37 and TABLE 52 respectively are used for the beam pairs in the longer and the shorter dimension to construct the master rank-2 codebook.
  • the details of the i 2 indices to beam pair mappings are shown in TABLE53.
  • the i 2 indices 0 - 15 are identical to those in TABLE 38 which correspond to Rel12 8-Tx rank-2 beam pairs for the longer dimension and the beam pair index 0 (TABLE 52) for the shorter dimension.
  • the i 2 indices 16 - 27 correspond to Rel12 8-Tx rank-2 beam pair indices ⁇ 0,1,3,4,5,7 ⁇ (TABLE 37) for the longer dimension and the beam pair index 1 (TABLE 52) for the shorter dimension.
  • Option 1 - 3 for the i 2 indices 28 - 31, which are shown in the table. The details of the three options are provided below.
  • the shaded and pattern squares represent the rank-2 i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that are obtained based on the beam grouping scheme or after subset restriction from the master codebook and the white squares represent the indices that are redundant and are hence not included in the master codebook.
  • Option 1 In this option, the four beams (0,0), (0,1), (1,1), and (1,0) are first numbered as 0,1,2, and 3 respectively, and then legacy 8-Tx rank-2 beam pairs are formed according to TABLE 37;
  • Option 3 In this option, 2 diagonal beam pairs corresponding to ⁇ (0,0),(1,1) ⁇ and ⁇ (0,1),(1,0) ⁇ , and 2 horizontal (or first or longer dimension) beam pairs corresponding to ⁇ (0,0),(0,1) ⁇ and ⁇ (1,0),(1,1) ⁇ beam pairs are considered.
  • the number of rank-2 i 2 indices with the subset restriction according to three beam grouping scheme is 16, so 4 bits are needed to report i 2 for the configured beam grouping scheme.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 47 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • a UE can be configured with the beam grouping scheme or CSS method (or a pair of numbers of beams in a beam group, i.e., (L 1 , L 2 )), so that the UE can restrict the rank-2 beam combinations as illustrated in FIGURE 47.
  • the UE is configured a beam grouping scheme or CSS method in the higher-layer according to TABLE 55.
  • Beam group 1 either one of Option 1, Option 2, and Option 3 is explicitly configured or one of the three is a default option (for example Option 1).
  • a UE can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected from Beam group 0, Beam group 1 (Option 1), Beam group (Option 2), Beam group 1 (Option 3), and Beam group 2.
  • RRC higher-layer
  • a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected from Beam group 0, Beam group 1 (Option 1), Beam group 1 (Option 2), Beam group 1 (Option 3), and Beam group 2.
  • the master rank-2 codebook comprises of beam pairs corresponding to all of Beam group 0, Beam group 1 (Option 1), Beam group 1 (Option 2), Beam group 1 (Option 3), and Beam group 2.
  • the corresponding rank-2 table is shown in TABLE 56. Note that in this mater codebook, the number of i 2 indices is 36. In one method, one rank-2 beam group out of five beam groups can be configured to a UE using this table.
  • the corresponding rank-2 table is shown in TABLE 57. Note that in this mater codebook, the number of i 2 indices is 38.
  • one rank-2 beam group out of five beam groups can be configured to a UE using this table.
  • FIGURE 48 illustrates rank 3 and rank 4 beam grouping schemes 4800 according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 48 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • a beam grouping scheme (or CSS method) is configured from Beam group 0 ? Beam group 2.
  • the master rank 3 and rank 4 codebooks are as in TABLE 40 and TABLE 41, respectively.
  • FIGURE 49 illustrates ranks 5 to 8 beam grouping schemes 4900 according to the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 49 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the beam grouping scheme (or CSS method) is configured from Beam group 0 and Beam group 2.
  • the master rank 5 - 8 codebooks are as in TABLE 43, Note that four orthogonal beam pairs ⁇ (0,8),(2,10),(4,12),(6,14) ⁇ in the first dimension are shown as shaded and pattern squares.
  • the four beams in Beam group 0 and Beam group 2 are numbered 0 - 3 as shown in the figure, and the corresponding 2D beam pairs are tabulated in TABLE 59.
  • the beam grouping scheme for each rank 1-8 codebooks may be configured based on a bitmap, where the length of the bitmap equals to number of beam combinations (for a given rank) in the master codebook.
  • K 1 x K 2 product of number of rank-2 beam pairs in two dimensions
  • the length of bitmaps for rank 3-8 codebooks can be determined similarly.
  • the bitmaps corresponding to the three beam groups, Beam group 0 - Beam group 2 are shown in columns 2 - 4, where 1 indicates the corresponding beam in the 2D grid is included in the beam group and 0 indicates otherwise.
  • the beam pair indices (1,0) indicates the beam pair 1 from TABLE 37 for the 1 st dimension, and the beam pair 0 from the TABLE 52 for the 2 nd dimension.
  • the bitmaps corresponding to the five rank-2 beam groups, Beam group 0, Beam group 1 (Option 1), Beam group 1 (Option 2), Beam group 1 (Option 3), and Beam group 2 are shown in columns 2 - 6, where 1 indicates the corresponding beam pair indices in the 2D grid is included in the rank-2 beam group and 0 indicates otherwise.
  • bitmap for each rank can be configured separately.
  • a composite bitmap obtained by concatenating bitmaps for all ranks are formed and bitmaps for all ranks are configured jointly using the composite bitmap.
  • multiple composite bitmaps are formed based on ranks and they are configured separately. For example, rank 1-2 form one composite bitmap, rank 3-4 form another composite bitmap, and rank 5-8 form another composite bitmap, and at least one of the three composite bitmaps is configured.
  • the bitmap can be configured using RRC.
  • the number of 1’s in the bitmap is fixed to a value for each rank 1-8.
  • the number of 1’s may be fixed to 4 for rank-1, and 8 for rank 2-4, and so on.
  • the number of 1’s may be fixed to 2 for rank-1, and 4 for rank 2-4, and so on.
  • the number of 1’s may be fixed to 1 for rank 1-4.
  • the number of 1’s in the bitmap is fixed to multiple values for each rank 1-8.
  • the number of 1’s may be fixed to ⁇ 1,4 ⁇ for rank-1, and ⁇ 1,8 ⁇ for rank 2-4.
  • a beam grouping scheme can be configured (e.g., based on a bitmap or a beam grouping scheme indicator).
  • the length of the bitmap equals to the number of i' 2 indices in the master codebook.
  • Examples of beam grouping scheme indication for rank-1 and rank-2 i' 2 are shown in TABLE 62 and TABLE 63, respectively based upon TABLE 35 and TABLE 56.
  • TABLE 62 shows selected rank-1 i' 2 indices determined dependent upon a selected beam group.
  • the selected indices can also be represented by a bitmap.
  • the codebook is determined by an equation: .
  • TABLE 63 shows selected rank-2 i' 2 indices determined dependent upon a selected beam group.
  • Beam group 1 options 1, 2 and 3 are constructed according to FIUGRE 47.
  • beam group 0 may be selected.
  • TABLE 38 may be used because indices 1 to 15 are used.
  • the reported second PMI i 2 by the UE spans 0-A, and are one-to-one mapped sequentially from the selected i' 2 indices (e.g., according to TABLE 61 for rank-1).
  • Example values for A 1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63.
  • the selected i' 2 indices 0-7 and 16-23 are sequentially one-to-one mapped to i 2 indices 0-15.
  • the codebooks for some of or all ranks 1-8 for each of 12, 16 and 32 antenna ports are fixed and no configuration is necessary.
  • such fixed codebooks are the master codebooks of rank 1-8 according to some embodiments of this disclosure.
  • the configured beam grouping scheme is the same for all ranks 1-8.
  • the configured beam grouping scheme is specific to each rank 1-8.
  • the configured beam grouping scheme is specific to a fixed subset of ranks from 1-8.
  • the beam grouping scheme is the same for all ranks, specific to each rank, or specific to a subset of ranks.
  • the beam grouping schemes for different ranks are pre-determined.
  • this decision is made at eNB.
  • UE indicates this to the eNB.
  • antenna port configurations (N 1 ,N 2 ) that are symmetric in the sense that the corresponding antenna port layouts are transpose of one another.
  • codebook table representing the different pre-coding vectors and matrices in the two layouts.
  • the two symmetric port configurations we can represent the two symmetric port configurations as N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config A) and N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config B), for example config A and B in FIGURES 5A to 5B.
  • the pre-coder is derived differently depending on the configured antenna port configuration.
  • the order in which the Kronecker product is performed is dependent on the configuration. For instance, for the configuration in which N 1 ⁇ N 2 , the UE derives the rank-1 pre-coder as , and for the configuration in which N 1 ⁇ N 2 , the UE derives the rank-1 pre-coder as . Note that the orders in which the Kronecker product is performed in the two expressions are opposite in order to ensure that the dimensions of the two vectors to the left and to the right of Kronecker operator are the same in the two expressions.
  • the KP expressions can be swapped for the two configurations:, i.e., if N 1 ⁇ N 2 we have ; and if N 1 ⁇ N 2 , we have . This applies to all the embodiments for other ranks as well.
  • the master rank-1 codebook table such as TABLE 35 can be used for both.
  • the pre-coding matrix is given by for N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config A), and it is for N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config B).
  • the expressions for rank 3-8 for the two configurations can be expression similarly. Similar to rank-1, for rank 2-8 also, the master rank 2-8 codebooks in this case remain the same as mentioned earlier in this disclosure.
  • the beam grouping schemes or (L 1 ,L 2 ) configurations or codebook subset selection according to some embodiments of this disclosure are applicable straightforwardly to this case once we have the master table for each of antenna port configurations.
  • the pre-coder for one of the symmetric port configuration is derived from that for the other symmetric port configuration by applying a fixed mapping on the elements of the pre-coding vector.
  • the mapping function is defined as Note that here the assumption is that O 1 and O 2 in case of N 1 ⁇ N 2 is the same as O 2 and O 1 in case of N 1 ⁇ N 2 , respectively.
  • the pre-coder for N 1 ⁇ N 2 can be derived by applying a similar fixed mapping on the pre-coder for N 1 ⁇ N 2 case.
  • mapping can be constructed similarly.
  • the first dimension is for the horizontal and the second dimension is for the vertical.
  • the codebook design below is applicable to the other case in which the first dimension is for the vertical and the second dimension is for the horizontal, or any other form of antenna port layouts including one-dimensional.
  • antenna port numbering 2 in the codebook tables.
  • the codebook tables for antenna port numbering 1 can be constructed similarly.
  • a UE is configured with two different rank-1 master codebooks for the two antenna port configurations, N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config A) and N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config B). If N 1 ⁇ N 2 , then the master rank-1 codebook is according to TABLE 35, and N 1 ⁇ N 2 , then the master rank-1 codebook is given by TABLE 64, that the beam grouping in the two codebooks constitute 4 beams in the longer dimension (4 ports) and 2 beams in shorter dimension.
  • codebook parameters are the same in the two codebooks, i.e., O 1 , O 2 , s 1 , s 2 , p 1 , and p 2 are the same. In another alternative, they are different. In yet another alternative, a subset of them is the same, and another subset is different. For example, O 1 and O 2 are different, but s 1 , s 2 , p 1 , and p 2 are the same.
  • a UE is configured with two different rank-2 master codebooks for the two antenna port configurations, N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config A) and N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config B). If N 1 ⁇ N 2 , then the master rank-2 codebook is according to TABLE 56 and N 1 ⁇ N 2 , then the master rank-2 codebook is given by TABLE 65. Note that the beam grouping in the two codebooks constitute 4 beams in the longer dimension (4 ports) and 2 beams in shorter dimension. TABLE 35 is constructed simular to TABLE 56 except that the Rel 12 8-Tx rank-2 beam pairs are considered for the 4 beams in vertical dimension (2nd dimension).
  • codebook parameters are the same in the two codebooks, i.e., O 1 , O 2 , s 1 , s 2 , p 1 , and p 2 are the same. In another alternative, they are different. In yet another alternative, a subset of them is the same, and another subset is different. For example, O 1 and O 2 are different, but s 1 , s 2 , p 1 , and p 2 are the same.
  • a UE is configured with two different rank-3 and rank-4 master codebooks for the two antenna port configurations, N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config A) and N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config B). If N 1 ⁇ N 2 , then the master rank-3 and rank-4 codebooks are according to TABLE 40 and TABLE 41, respectively, and if N 1 ⁇ N 2 , then they are given TABLE 8 and TABLE 67, respectively, wherein the corresponding rank 3 precoder is either or , and the corresponding rank 4 precoder is .
  • TABLE 66 and TABLE 67 respectively are constructed simular to TABLE 40 and TABLE 41 except that the four orthogonal beam pairs ⁇ (0,8),(2,10),(4,12),(6,14) ⁇ are considered in the vertical dimension (2nd dimension).
  • the parameters in the other dimension of the two codebooks are the same in both codebooks, i.e., O 2 , s 2 , and p 2 in case of N 1 ⁇ N 2 are the same as O 1 , s 1 , and p 1 in case of N 1 ⁇ N 2 .
  • they are different.
  • a subset of them is the same, and another subset is different. For example, O 1 in case of N 1 ⁇ N 2 and O 2 in case of N 1 ⁇ N 2 are different, but other parameters are the same.
  • a UE is configured with two different rank 5-8 master codebooks for the two antenna port configurations, N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config A) and N 1 ⁇ N 2 (config B). If N 1 ⁇ N 2 , then the master rank 5-8 codebooks are according to TABLE 43, and if N 1 ⁇ N 2 , then they are given by TABLE 68, wherein the corresponding rank-5 precoder is
  • the beam grouping in the two codebooks constitute 4 orthogonal beams ⁇ 0,8,16,24 ⁇ in the longer dimension (4 ports) and 2 beams in shorter dimension.
  • TABLE 68 is constructed simular to TABLE 43 except that the four orthogonal beams ⁇ 0,8,16,24 ⁇ are considered in the vertical dimension (2nd dimension).
  • the configuration about the selected beam group or codebook subset selection from the master codebook of rank 1-8 in this different master codebook case is according to some embodiments of this disclosure, wherein the configuration of the beam group is dependent upon the configured (N 1 , N 2 ).
  • the beam groups are as shown in FIGURE 47 and for N 1 ⁇ N 2 , they are the transpose of the corresponding beam groups in FIGURE 47.
  • a codebook for 8, 12, or 16 antenna ports is suggested in the present disclosure.
  • m i is the index for X i ;
  • X 1 is a N 1 xL 1 matrix with L 1 column vectors being an O 1 x oversampled DFT vector of length N 1 :
  • X 2 is a N 2 xL 2 matrix with L 2 column vectors being an O 2 x oversampled DFT vector of length N 2 :
  • a subset of codewords from the codebook table is selected for W 2 or i 2 to be reported.
  • the number of i 2 hypotheses after CSS will be 16 for rank 1, 2 and 3, which is smaller than the total number of i 2 indices in the rank-specific codebook table.
  • the CSS allows non-adjacent 2D beam sampling.
  • the choice of subset is configured via RRC in the form on CSS configuration, which determines a 2D beam group used in W 1 .
  • the indicated 2D beam group satisfies the condition L 1 ⁇ L 2 ⁇ 4.
  • the indicated beam group is one of the following four:
  • An example of such a beam group is 820 in FGIURE 35;
  • a few examples of such a beam group are 830a, 830b, 830c in FIGURE 35;
  • a few examples of such a beam group are 830d, 380e, 830f in FIGURE 35; and
  • An example of such a beam group is 860 in FIGURE 35.
  • the W 2 payload size varies according to 2D beam group configuration.
  • the payload is 4 bits for rank-1 i 2 reporting, and it is 2 bits for BG3 assuming QPSK alphabet ⁇ 1,j,-1,-j ⁇ for co-phase reporting, and no beam selection information is necessary here.
  • the beam groups (BG) can be classified into two sets:
  • W may be represented as W 1 and W 2 .
  • W 1 and W 2 may correspond to Wide-Band (WB), and Sub-Band (SB).
  • a first payload for W 1 can be expressed in ceil(log 2 (N 1 O 1 /2)) + ceil(log 2 (N 2 O 2 /2)) bits.
  • the first payload may be expressed in i 1,1 , and i 1,2 .
  • i 1,1 can be expressed in ceil(log 2 (N 1 O 1 /2)).
  • i 1,2 can be expressed in ceil(log 2 (N 2 O 2 /2)).
  • the ceil function provides an integer which is bigger than an input and is the nearest to the input. For example, ceil(3.6) is four.
  • i 1,1 can be expressed as .
  • i 1,2 can be expressed as .
  • a UE can be configured with either Set 1 or Set 2 by RRC.
  • only one BG is included in Set 1.
  • the UE is also configured with a BG if Set 1 is configured. Then, the UE will report PMI, of which the payload size is determined dependent upon which set is configured; in addition the UE will use the configured BG to select a beam and corresponding precoder.
  • a UE can be configured with a BG out of BG0, BG1, BG2, and BG3 by RRC.
  • the UE determines the set to which the configured BG belongs, which in turn determines the payload size for PMI reporting.
  • the UE then uses the configured BG to select a beam and corresponding precoder.
  • a UE is configured to select and report one of Set 1 and Set 2 to eNB, which uses the selected set to configure PMI codebook.
  • only one BG is included in Set 1.
  • UE also selects a BG if it reports Set 1.
  • the UE may comprise a configuration parameter to be configured with a codebook.
  • the configuration parameter may indicate one of a plurality of BGs.
  • the configuration parameter may indicate a pattern of combination for at least one beam. The pattern of the combination can be expressed by dividing a first dimension (L 1 ) and a second dimension (L 2 ).
  • a UE is configured to select and report one of BG0, BG1, BG2, and BG3 to eNB, which uses the selected BG to configure PMI codebook.
  • FIGURE 50 illustrates the master rank-2 codebook 5000 designed according to Design 1 according to the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 50 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the codebook comprises of rank-2 beam pairs corresponding to four rank-2 configurations (or beam grouping schemes):
  • the shaded and pattern squares represent the rank-2 i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that are selected based at least one of the four configurations (or beam grouping schemes) and the white squares represent the indices that are not selected by any configurations.
  • FIGURE 51 illustrates the master rank-2 codebook 5100 designed according to Design 2 according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 51 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the codebook comprises of rank-2 beam pairs corresponding to four rank-2 configurations (or beam grouping schemes):
  • the shaded and pattern squares represent the rank-2 i 2 (or i 2,1 and i 2,2 ) indices that are selected based at least one of the four configurations (or beam grouping schemes) and the white squares represent the indices that are not selected by any configurations.
  • FIGURE 52 illustrates beam grouping options 5200 for Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 51 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • a UE is configured with one of Option 0 and Option 1 if it is configured with Config 2.
  • a UE is configured with Config 2 with the pre-determined option, for example Option 0.
  • a UE is configured with one of Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4.
  • the UE selects i' 2 indices in TABLE 69 (or TABLE 70) according to TABLE 71 and sequentially maps them to 0 - 1 for Config 1, and 0 - 15 for Config 2-4 in order to report i 2 PMI.
  • a UE uses the beam group spacing parameters (s 1 ,s 2 ) according to TABLE 71 depending on the configuration.
  • (s 1 ,s 2 ) may be (1,1). If the configuration parameter is 2, 3, or 4, (s 1 ,s 2 ) may be (2,2).
  • a UE reports a preferred configuration, selected from Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4.
  • the master rank-2 codebook is designed by selecting at least one rank-2 beam pair option from multiple options shown in FIGURE 52 for each of Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4.
  • a UE is configured with one configuration from the Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4 that comprise the master codebook according to some embodiments of this disclosure.
  • a UE reports one configuration from the Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4 that comprise the master codebook according to some embodiment.
  • FIGURE 53 illustrates rank 2 beam pairs 5300 based on nested property with rank 1 beams according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
  • the embodiment shown in FIGURE 51 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
  • the master rank-2 codebook is designed with the nested property with the rank-1 codebook in the sense that the rank-2 beam pairs for the two layers are formed using the beams in the rank-1 codebook (TABLE 35).
  • the nested master rank-2 codebook is designed as shown in FIGURE 53.
  • the codebook comprises of rank-2 beam pairs corresponding to four configurations (or beam grouping schemes), namely Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4, where:
  • Config 1 corresponds to a single beam located at (0,0), and hence the corresponding rank-2 beam pair is (00,00).
  • Config 2-4 correspond to beam grouping schemes with 4 beams. As shown in the leftmost column of FIGURE 53, for each of Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4, the four rank-1 beams are numbered as 0, 1, 2, and 3. From these numbered rank-1 beams, eight rank-2 beam pairs are constructed as follows:
  • FIGURE 53 shows all rank-2 beam pairs according to this construction. Note that there are 18 (17) rank-2 beam pairs for Options 0-1 (Option 2) that are numbered as 0 - 17 (16) in the figure.
  • the shaded and pattern squares represent the rank-2 beam pairs that are selected based at least one of the four configurations (or beam grouping schemes) and the white squares represent the indices that are not selected by any configurations.
  • a UE is configured with one of Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4.
  • the UE selects i' 2 indices in TABLE 73 according to TABLE 74 and sequentially maps them to 0 - 1 for Config 1, and 0 - 15 for Config 2-4 in order to report i 2 PMI.
  • a UE uses the beam group spacing parameters (s 1 ,s 2 ) according to TABLE 74 depending on the configuration.
  • the nested master rank-2 beam pairs are obtained by selecting eight out of ten rank-2 beam pairs shown in TABLE 75. Note that beam pair indices 0-7 correspond to legacy Rel10 rank-2 beam pairs, and beam pair indices 8-9 correspond to non-Rel10 rank-2 beam pairs.
  • the corresponding nested master rank-2 codebook can be constructed similar to the previous and other embodiments of this disclosure.
  • a computer-readable storage medium for storing one or more programs (software modules) may be provided.
  • the one or more programs stored in the computer-readable storage medium may be configured for execution by one or more processors within the electronic device.
  • the at least one program may include instructions that cause the electronic device to perform the methods according to various embodiments of the present disclosure as defined by the appended claims and/or disclosed herein.
  • the programs may be stored in non-volatile memories including a random access memory and a flash memory, a Read Only Memory (ROM), an Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM), a magnetic disc storage device, a Compact Disc-ROM (CD-ROM), Digital Versatile Discs (DVDs), or other type optical storage devices, or a magnetic cassette.
  • ROM Read Only Memory
  • EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
  • CD-ROM Compact Disc-ROM
  • DVDs Digital Versatile Discs
  • any combination of some or all of the may form a memory in which the program is stored. Further, a plurality of such memories may be included in the electronic device.
  • the programs may be stored in an attachable storage device which may access the electronic device through communication networks such as the Internet, Intranet, Local Area Network (LAN), Wide LAN (WLAN), and Storage Area Network (SAN) or a combination thereof.
  • a storage device may access the electronic device via an external port.
  • a separate storage device on the communication network may access a portable electronic device.
  • a component included in the present disclosure is expressed in the singular or the plural according to a presented detailed embodiment.
  • the singular or plural expressions are selected to be suitable for proposed situations for convenience of description, and the present disclosure is not limited to the singular or plural elements.
  • An element expressed in a plural form may be configured in singular, or an element expressed in a singular form may be configured in plural.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present disclosure relates to a pre-5th-Generation (5G) or 5G communication system to be provided for supporting higher data rates Beyond 4th-Generation (4G) communication system such as Long Term Evolution (LTE). According to various embodiments, an apparatus of a UE in a wireless communication system, the apparatus comprises a transceiver, and a controller operatively coupled with transceiver. The controller is configured to receive, from a base station, downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook, and transmit, to the base station, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters. The parameters comprises a first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension, a second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension, a third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension, and a fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.

Description

APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR USING CODEBOOK WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
The present disclosure relates generally to wireless communication system, specifically to apparatus and method for using a codebook associated with a two dimensional transmit antenna array.
To meet the demand for wireless data traffic having increased since deployment of 4th generation (4G) communication systems, efforts have been made to develop an improved 5th generation (5G) or pre-5G communication system. Therefore, the 5G or pre-5G communication system is also called a ‘Beyond 4G Network’ or a ‘Post LTE System’.
The 5G communication system is considered to be implemented in higher frequency (mmWave) bands, e.g., 60GHz bands, so as to accomplish higher data rates. To decrease propagation loss of the radio waves and increase the transmission distance, the beamforming, massive multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO), Full Dimensional MIMO (FD-MIMO), array antenna, an analog beam forming, large scale antenna techniques are discussed in 5G communication systems.
In addition, in 5G communication systems, development for system network improvement is under way based on advanced small cells, cloud Radio Access Networks (RANs), ultra-dense networks, device-to-device (D2D) communication, wireless backhaul, moving network, cooperative communication, Coordinated Multi-Points (CoMP), reception-end interference cancellation and the like.
In the 5G system, Hybrid Frequency Shift Keying and Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (FQAM) and sliding window superposition coding (SWSC) as an advanced coding modulation (ACM), and filter bank multi carrier (FBMC), non-orthogonal multiple access (NOMA), and sparse code multiple access (SCMA) as an advanced access technology have been developed.
Due to increasing volume of traffic in a wireless communication system, improvements in radio interface efficiency and coverage are required.
According to various embodiments, a method for operating a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system, the method comprises receiving, from a base station, downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook, and transmitting, to the base station, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters. The parameters comprises a first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension, a second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension, a third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension, and a fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
According to various embodiments, a method for operating a base station in a wireless communication system, the method comprises transmitting, to a UE, downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook, and receiving, from the UE, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters. The parameters comprises first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension, second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension, third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension, and fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
According to various embodiments, an apparatus of a UE in a wireless communication system, the apparatus comprises a transceiver, and a controller operatively coupled with transceiver. The controller is configured to receive, from a base station, downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook, and transmit, to the base station, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters. The parameters comprises a first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension, a second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension, a third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension, and a fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
According to various embodiments, an apparatus of a base station, the apparatus comprises a storage unit configured to store information associated with precoding, and a transceiver. The transceiver is configured to transmit, to a user equipment (UE), downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook, and receive, from the UE, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters. The parameters comprises first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension, second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension, third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension, and fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
For a more complete understanding of the present disclosure and its advantages, reference is now made to the following description taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings, in which like reference numerals represent like parts:
FIGURE 1 illustrates an example wireless network according to this disclosure;
FIGURES 2A and 2B illustrate example wireless transmit and receive paths according to this disclosure;
FIGURE 3A illustrates an example user equipment according to this disclosure;
FIGURE 3B illustrates an example enhanced NodeB (eNB) according to this disclosure;
FIGURE 4 illustrates logical port to antenna port mapping 400 that may be employed within the wireless communication system according to some embodiments of the current disclosure;
FIGURES 5A to 5D illustrate antenna configurations and antenna numberings according to some embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 6 illustrates a precoding weight application to antenna configurations of FIGURES 5A to 5D for Numbering scheme 1;
FIGURE 7 illustrates a 4x4 dual-polarized antenna array 700 with antenna port (AP) indexing 1;
FIGURE 8 is a 4x4 dual-polarized antenna array 800 with antenna port indexing (AP) indexing 2;
FIGURE 9 illustrates another numbering of TX antenna elements 900 (or TXRU(transceiver unit)) according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 10 illustrates a beam grouping scheme corresponding to Scheme 1 in TABLE 1 according to embodiment of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 11 illustrates a beam grouping scheme corresponding to Scheme 2 in TABLE 1 according to the embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 12 illustrates a beam grouping scheme 1200 corresponding to Scheme 3 in TABLE 1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 13 illustrates a new codebook construction 1300 according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 14 illustrates another new codebook construction according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 15 illustrates a new codebook construction for P=32 antenna ports according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 16 shows example beam patterns according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 17 illustrates an alternate codebook construction in which two different vertical beams may be applied for the two polarizations according to the present disclosure;
FIGURE 18 illustrates PUCCH mode 1-1 submode 1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 19 illustrates an example UE elevation angle distribution in cellular wireless systems, in urban macro (UMa) and urban micro (UMi) cases;
FIGURES 20 to 22 illustrate three examples of PUCCH mode 1-1 submode 1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURES 23 illustrates an example of PUCCH mode 1-1 submode x according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURES 24 to 26 illustrates respective beam grouping schemes 1, 2 and 3 according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 27 illustrates a master codebook with example beam groups for N1 = 4 and N2 = 4 according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 28 illustrates the subset restriction on rank-1 i1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 29 illustrates the example beam groups in the master codebook after subset restriction according to the present disclosure;
FIGURE 30 illustrates the subset restriction 300 on rank-1 i2 according to the embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 31 illustrates a flowchart 3100 for UE operation for configuring parametrized codebook 3100 according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 32 illustrates a flowchart of the overall eNB and UE operation according to the parameterized codebook according to the present disclosure;
FIGURE 33 illustrates an example beam group type in which beams are adjacent in both dimensions according to the present disclosure;
FIGURES 34A and 34B illustrate another example beam group types in which a beam group consists of orthogonal beam pairs in the first (horizontal) dimension, and adjacent beams in the second (vertical) dimension;
FIGURE 35 illustrates alternative rank-1 beam grouping schemes according to some embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 36 illustrate a beam combination to construct rank-2 master codebook according to some embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 37 illustrates rank-2 beam grouping schemes for rank-2 i2 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 38 illustrates a beam combination to construct rank-3 and rank-4 master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 39 illustrates grouping schemes for rank-3 and rank-4 i2 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 40 illustrates a beam combination to construct rank 5 - 8 beam combination master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 41 illustrates grouping schemes for rank 5-8 i2 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 42 illustrate a beam combination to construct a master codebook for rank-2 beam combinations according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 43 illustrates rank-2 beam grouping schemes according to some embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 44 illustrates beam grouping schemes for rank-3 and rank-4 i2 according to the present disclosure;
FIGURE 45 illustrates a beam combination to construct ranks 5 - 8 master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 46 illustrates beam grouping schemes for ranks 5-8 i2 indices according to the embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 47 illustrates beam grouping scheme or codebook subset selection on rank-2 i2 indices in terms of parameters L1 and L2, according to the embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 48 illustrates rank 3 and rank 4 beam grouping schemes according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 49 illustrates ranks 5 to 8 beam grouping schemes according to the present disclosure;
FIGURE 50 illustrates the master rank-2 codebook designed according to Design 1 according to the present disclosure;
FIGURE 51 illustrates the master rank-2 codebook designed according to Design 2 according to embodiments of the present disclosure;
FIGURE 52 illustrates beam grouping options for Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4 according to the present disclosure; and
FIGURE 53 illustrates rank 2 beam pairs based on nested property with rank 1 beam according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
FIGURES 1 through 53, discussed below, and the various embodiments used to describe the principles of the present disclosure in this patent document are by way of illustration only and should not be construed in any way to limit the scope of the disclosure. Those skilled in the art will understand that the principles of the present disclosure may be implemented in any suitably arranged wireless communication system.
Terms used in the present disclosure are for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and are not intended to limit other embodiments. A singular expression may include a plural expression unless there is a contextually distinctive difference. Unless otherwise defined, all terms (including technical and scientific terms) used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by those ordinarily skilled in the art to which various embodiments of the present disclosure belong. It will be further understood that terms, such as those defined in commonly used dictionaries, should be interpreted as having a meaning that is consistent with their meaning in the context of the relevant art, and will not be interpreted in an idealized or overly formal sense unless expressly so defined herein. Optionally, the terms defined in the present document should not be interpreted to exclude the various embodiments of the present disclosure.
Various embodiments of the present disclosure are described in terms of a hardware-based approach. However, the various embodiments of the present disclosure may encompass a technology that uses both hardware and software, and thus, are not intended to exclude a software-based approach.
In the following description, the present disclosure describes apparatus and method for using a codebook in a wireless communication system.
In the following description, terms indicating control information, terms indicating parameters associated with a codebook for precoding, terms indicating network entities, terms indicating messages, and components are examples only, for convenience. Therefore, the present disclosure is not limited by the following terms, and different terms which have an equivalent meaning may be used instead of the following terms.
Also, for convenience, terms and names defined in 3rd Generation Partnership Project Long Term Evolution (3GPP LTE) are used in the present disclosure. However, the present disclosure is not limited by the terms and the names, and the present disclosure can be applied to system conforming to other standards.
The following documents and standards descriptions are hereby incorporated by reference into the present disclosure as if fully set forth herein: (1) 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) TS 36.211, “E-UTRA, Physical channels and modulation”, Release-12; (2) 3GPP TS 36.212, “E-UTRA, Multiplexing and channel coding”, Release-12; and (3) 3GPP TS 36.213, “E-UTRA, Physical layer procedures”, Release-12.
FIGURE 1 illustrates an example wireless network 100 according to this disclosure. The embodiment of the wireless network 100 shown in FIGURE 1 is for illustration only. Other embodiments of the wireless network 100 could be used without departing from the scope of this disclosure.
The wireless network 100 includes an eNodeB (eNB) 101, an eNB 102, and an eNB 103. The eNB 101 communicates with the eNB 102 and the eNB 103. The eNB 101 also communicates with at least one Internet Protocol (IP) network 130, such as the Internet, a proprietary IP network, or other data network.
Depending on the network type, other well-known terms may be used instead of “eNodeB” or “eNB,” such as “base station” or “access point.” For the sake of convenience, the terms “eNodeB” and “eNB” are used in this patent document to refer to network infrastructure components that provide wireless access to remote terminals. Also, depending on the network type, other well-known terms may be used instead of “user equipment” or “UE,” such as “mobile station,” “subscriber station,” “remote terminal,” “wireless terminal,” or “user device.” For the sake of convenience, the terms “user equipment” and “UE” are used in this patent document to refer to remote wireless equipment that wirelessly accesses an eNB, whether the UE is a mobile device (such as a mobile telephone or smartphone) or is normally considered a stationary device (such as a desktop computer or vending machine).
The eNB 102 provides wireless broadband access to the network 130 for a first plurality of user equipments (UEs) within a coverage area 120 of the eNB 102. The first plurality of UEs includes a UE 111, which may be located in a small business (SB); a UE 112, which may be located in an enterprise (E); a UE 113, which may be located in a WiFi hotspot (HS); a UE 114, which may be located in a first residence (R); a UE 115, which may be located in a second residence (R); and a UE 116, which may be a mobile device (M) like a cell phone, a wireless laptop, a wireless PDA, or the like. The eNB 103 provides wireless broadband access to the network 130 for a second plurality of UEs within a coverage area 125 of the eNB 103. The second plurality of UEs includes the UE 115 and the UE 116. In some embodiments, one or more of the eNBs 101-103 may communicate with each other and with the UEs 111-116 using 5G, long-term evolution (LTE), LTE-A, WiMAX, or other advanced wireless communication techniques.
Dotted lines show the approximate extents of the coverage areas 120 and 125, which are shown as approximately circular for the purposes of illustration and explanation only. It should be clearly understood that the coverage areas associated with eNBs, such as the coverage areas 120 and 125, may have other shapes, including irregular shapes, depending upon the configuration of the eNBs and variations in the radio environment associated with natural and man-made obstructions.
As described in more detail below, one or more of BS 101, BS 102 and BS 103 include 2D antenna arrays as described in embodiments of the present disclosure. In some embodiments, one or more of BS 101, BS 102 and BS 103 support the codebook design and structure for systems having 2D antenna arrays.
Although FIGURE 1 illustrates one example of a wireless network 100, various changes may be made to FIGURE 1. For example, the wireless network 100 could include any number of eNBs and any number of UEs in any suitable arrangement. Also, the eNB 101 could communicate directly with any number of UEs and provide those UEs with wireless broadband access to the network 130. Similarly, each eNB 102-103 could communicate directly with the network 130 and provide UEs with direct wireless broadband access to the network 130. Further, the eNB 101, 102, and/or 103 could provide access to other or additional external networks, such as external telephone networks or other types of data networks.
FIGURES 2A and 2B illustrate example wireless transmit and receive paths according to this disclosure. In the following description, a transmit path 200 may be described as being implemented in an eNB (such as eNB 102), while a receive path 250 may be described as being implemented in a UE (such as UE 116). However, it will be understood that the receive path 250 could be implemented in an eNB and that the transmit path 200 could be implemented in a UE. In some embodiments, the receive path 250 is configured to support the codebook design and structure for systems having 2D antenna arrays as described in embodiments of the present disclosure.
The transmit path 200 includes a channel coding and modulation block 205, a serial-to-parallel (S-to-P) block 210, a size N Inverse Fast Fourier Transform (IFFT) block 215, a parallel-to-serial (P-to-S) block 220, an add cyclic prefix block 225, and an up-converter (UC) 230. The receive path 250 includes a down-converter (DC) 255, a remove cyclic prefix block 260, a serial-to-parallel (S-to-P) block 265, a size N Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) block 270, a parallel-to-serial (P-to-S) block 275, and a channel decoding and demodulation block 280.
In the transmit path 200, the channel coding and modulation block 205 receives a set of information bits, applies coding (such as a low-density parity check (LDPC) coding), and modulates the input bits (such as with Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) or Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)) to generate a sequence of frequency-domain modulation symbols. The serial-to-parallel block 210 converts (such as de-multiplexes) the serial modulated symbols to parallel data in order to generate N parallel symbol streams, where N is the IFFT/FFT size used in the eNB 102 and the UE 116. The size N IFFT block 215 performs an IFFT operation on the N parallel symbol streams to generate time-domain output signals. The parallel-to-serial block 220 converts (such as multiplexes) the parallel time-domain output symbols from the size N IFFT block 215 in order to generate a serial time-domain signal. The add cyclic prefix block 225 inserts a cyclic prefix to the time-domain signal. The up-converter 230 modulates (such as up-converts) the output of the add cyclic prefix block 225 to an RF frequency for transmission via a wireless channel. The signal may also be filtered at baseband before conversion to the RF frequency.
A transmitted RF signal from the eNB 102 arrives at the UE 116 after passing through the wireless channel, and reverse operations to those at the eNB 102 are performed at the UE 116. The down-converter 255 down-converts the received signal to a baseband frequency, and the remove cyclic prefix block 260 removes the cyclic prefix to generate a serial time-domain baseband signal. The serial-to-parallel block 265 converts the time-domain baseband signal to parallel time domain signals. The size N FFT block 270 performs an FFT algorithm to generate N parallel frequency-domain signals. The parallel-to-serial block 275 converts the parallel frequency-domain signals to a sequence of modulated data symbols. The channel decoding and demodulation block 280 demodulates and decodes the modulated symbols to recover the original input data stream.
Each of the eNBs 101-103 may implement a transmit path 200 that is analogous to transmitting in the downlink to UEs 111-116 and may implement a receive path 250 that is analogous to receiving in the uplink from UEs 111-116. Similarly, each of UEs 111-116 may implement a transmit path 200 for transmitting in the uplink to eNBs 101-103 and may implement a receive path 250 for receiving in the downlink from eNBs 101-103.
Each of the components in FIGURES 2A and 2B can be implemented using only hardware or using a combination of hardware and software/firmware. As a particular example, at least some of the components in FIGURES 2A and 2B may be implemented in software, while other components may be implemented by configurable hardware or a mixture of software and configurable hardware. For instance, the FFT block 270 and the IFFT block 215 may be implemented as configurable software algorithms, where the value of size N may be modified according to the implementation.
Furthermore, although described as using FFT and IFFT, this is by way of illustration only and should not be construed to limit the scope of this disclosure. Other types of transforms, such as Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) and Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform (IDFT) functions, could be used. It will be appreciated that the value of the variable N may be any integer number (such as 1, 2, 3, 4, or the like) for DFT and IDFT functions, while the value of the variable N may be any integer number that is a power of two (such as 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or the like) for FFT and IFFT functions.
Although FIGURES 2A and 2B illustrate examples of wireless transmit and receive paths, various changes may be made to FIGURES 2A and 2B. For example, various components in FIGURES 2A and 2B could be combined, further subdivided, or omitted and additional components could be added according to particular needs. Also, FIGURES 2A and 2B are meant to illustrate examples of the types of transmit and receive paths that could be used in a wireless network. Any other suitable architectures could be used to support wireless communications in a wireless network.
FIGURE 3A illustrates an example UE 116 according to this disclosure. The embodiment of the UE 116 illustrated in FIGURE 3A is for illustration only, and the UEs 111-115 of FIGURE 1 could have the same or similar configuration. However, UEs come in a wide variety of configurations, and FIGURE 3A does not limit the scope of this disclosure to any particular implementation of a UE.
The UE 116 includes an antenna 305, a radio frequency (RF) transceiver 310, transmit (TX) processing circuitry 315, a microphone 320, and receive (RX) processing circuitry 325. The UE 116 also includes a speaker 330, a main processor 340, an input/output (I/O) interface (IF) 345, a keypad 350, a display 355, and a memory 360. The memory 360 includes a basic operating system (OS) program 361 and one or more applications 362.
The RF transceiver 310 receives, from the antenna 305, an incoming RF signal transmitted by an eNB of the network 100. The RF transceiver 310 down-converts the incoming RF signal to generate an intermediate frequency (IF) or baseband signal. The IF or baseband signal is sent to the RX processing circuitry 325, which generates a processed baseband signal by filtering, decoding, and/or digitizing the baseband or IF signal. The RX processing circuitry 325 transmits the processed baseband signal to the speaker 330 (such as for voice data) or to the main processor 340 for further processing (such as for web browsing data).
The TX processing circuitry 315 receives analog or digital voice data from the microphone 320 or other outgoing baseband data (such as web data, e-mail, or interactive video game data) from the main processor 340. The TX processing circuitry 315 encodes, multiplexes, and/or digitizes the outgoing baseband data to generate a processed baseband or IF signal. The RF transceiver 310 receives the outgoing processed baseband or IF signal from the TX processing circuitry 315 and up-converts the baseband or IF signal to an RF signal that is transmitted via the antenna 305.
The main processor 340 can include one or more processors or other processing devices and execute the basic OS program 361 stored in the memory 360 in order to control the overall operation of the UE 116. For example, the main processor 340 could control the reception of forward channel signals and the transmission of reverse channel signals by the RF transceiver 310, the RX processing circuitry 325, and the TX processing circuitry 315 in accordance with well-known principles. In some embodiments, the main processor 340 includes at least one microprocessor or microcontroller.
The main processor 340 is also capable of executing other processes and programs resident in the memory 360, such as operations for channel quality measurement and reporting for systems having 2D antenna arrays as described in embodiments of the present disclosure as described in embodiments of the present disclosure. The main processor 340 can move data into or out of the memory 360 as required by an executing process. In some embodiments, the main processor 340 is configured to execute the applications 362 based on the OS program 361 or in response to signals received from eNBs or an operator. The main processor 340 is also coupled to the I/O interface 345, which provides the UE 116 with the ability to connect to other devices such as laptop computers and handheld computers. The I/O interface 345 is the communication path between these accessories and the main controller 340.
The main processor 340 is also coupled to the keypad 350 and the display unit 355. The operator of the UE 116 can use the keypad 350 to enter data into the UE 116. The display 355 may be a liquid crystal display or other display capable of rendering text and/or at least limited graphics, such as from web sites.
The memory 360 is coupled to the main processor 340. Part of the memory 360 could include a random access memory (RAM), and another part of the memory 360 could include a Flash memory or other read-only memory (ROM).
Although FIGURE 3A illustrates one example of UE 116, various changes may be made to FIGURE 3A. For example, various components in FIGURE 3A could be combined, further subdivided, or omitted and additional components could be added according to particular needs. As a particular example, the main processor 340 could be divided into multiple processors, such as one or more central processing units (CPUs) and one or more graphics processing units (GPUs). Also, while FIGURE 3A illustrates the UE 116 configured as a mobile telephone or smartphone, UEs could be configured to operate as other types of mobile or stationary devices.
FIGURE 3B illustrates an example eNB 102 according to this disclosure. The embodiment of the eNB 102 shown in FIGURE 3B is for illustration only, and other eNBs of FIGURE 1 could have the same or similar configuration. However, eNBs come in a wide variety of configurations, and FIGURE 3B does not limit the scope of this disclosure to any particular implementation of an eNB. It is noted that eNB 101 and eNB 103 can include the same or similar structure as eNB 102.
As shown in FIGURE 3B, the eNB 102 includes multiple antennas 370a-370n, multiple RF transceivers 372a-372n, transmit (TX) processing circuitry 374, and receive (RX) processing circuitry 376. In certain embodiments, one or more of the multiple antennas 370a-370n include 2D antenna arrays. The eNB 102 also includes a controller/processor 378, a memory 380, and a backhaul or network interface 382.
The RF transceivers 372a-372n receive, from the antennas 370a-370n, incoming RF signals, such as signals transmitted by UEs or other eNBs. The RF transceivers 372a-372n down-convert the incoming RF signals to generate IF or baseband signals. The IF or baseband signals are sent to the RX processing circuitry 376, which generates processed baseband signals by filtering, decoding, and/or digitizing the baseband or IF signals. The RX processing circuitry 376 transmits the processed baseband signals to the controller/ processor 378 for further processing.
The TX processing circuitry 374 receives analog or digital data (such as voice data, web data, e-mail, or interactive video game data) from the controller/processor 378. The TX processing circuitry 374 encodes, multiplexes, and/or digitizes the outgoing baseband data to generate processed baseband or IF signals. The RF transceivers 372a-372n receive the outgoing processed baseband or IF signals from the TX processing circuitry 374 and up-converts the baseband or IF signals to RF signals that are transmitted via the antennas 370a-370n.
The controller/processor 378 can include one or more processors or other processing devices that control the overall operation of the eNB 102. For example, the controller/processor 378 could control the reception of forward channel signals and the transmission of reverse channel signals by the RF transceivers 372a-372n, the RX processing circuitry 376, and the TX processing circuitry 324 in accordance with well-known principles. The controller/processor 378 could support additional functions as well, such as more advanced wireless communication functions. For instance, the controller/processor 378 can perform the blind interference sensing (BIS) process, such as performed by a BIS algorithm, and decodes the received signal subtracted by the interfering signals. Any of a wide variety of other functions could be supported in the eNB 102 by the controller/processor 378. In some embodiments, the controller/ processor 378 includes at least one microprocessor or microcontroller.
The controller/processor 378 is also capable of executing programs and other processes resident in the memory 380, such as a basic OS. The controller/processor 378 is also capable of supporting channel quality measurement and reporting for systems having 2D antenna arrays as described in embodiments of the present disclosure. In some embodiments, the controller/processor 378 supports communications between entities, such as web RTC. The controller/processor 378 can move data into or out of the memory 380 as required by an executing process.
The controller/processor 378 is also coupled to the backhaul or network interface 335. The backhaul or network interface 382 allows the eNB 102 to communicate with other devices or systems over a backhaul connection or over a network. The interface 382 could support communications over any suitable wired or wireless connection(s). For example, when the eNB 102 is implemented as part of a cellular communication system (such as one supporting 5G, LTE, or LTE-A), the interface 382 could allow the eNB 102 to communicate with other eNBs over a wired or wireless backhaul connection. When the eNB 102 is implemented as an access point, the interface 382 could allow the eNB 102 to communicate over a wired or wireless local area network or over a wired or wireless connection to a larger network (such as the Internet). The interface 382 includes any suitable structure supporting communications over a wired or wireless connection, such as an Ethernet or RF transceiver.
The memory 380 is coupled to the controller/processor 325. Part of the memory 330 could include a RAM, and another part of the memory 380 could include a Flash memory or other ROM. In certain embodiments, a plurality of instructions, such as a BIS algorithm is stored in memory. The plurality of instructions are configured to cause the controller/processor 378 to perform the BIS process and to decode a received signal after subtracting out at least one interfering signal determined by the BIS algorithm.
As described in more detail below, the transmit and receive paths of the eNB 102 (implemented using the RF transceivers 372a-372n, TX processing circuitry 374, and/or RX processing circuitry 376) support communication with aggregation of FDD cells and TDD cells.
Although FIGURE 3B illustrates one example of an eNB 102, various changes may be made to FIGURE 3B. For example, the eNB 102 could include any number of each component shown in FIGURE 3. As a particular example, an access point could include a number of interfaces 382, and the controller/processor 378 could support routing functions to route data between different network addresses. As another particular example, while shown as including a single instance of TX processing circuitry 374 and a single instance of RX processing circuitry 376, the eNB 102 could include multiple instances of each (such as one per RF transceiver).
In the following description, it is assumed that a wireless environment for a Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) system. For supporting a MIMO system, a user equipment (UE) and a base station in the present disclosure may use a precoding scheme which divides uplink information and downlink information to each of antennas appropriately according to channel state.
The UE and the base station may use a precoding scheme based on codebook information for precoding. In the precoding scheme based on codebook information, The UE and the base station may determine beforehand a set of precoding matrices. The UE may determine a precoding matrix indicator (PMI) indicating a certain precoding matrix in the set of precoding matrices by using information associated with channel state between the base station. The UE may transmit the PMI to the base station. In this way, the base station may share the certain precoding matrix with the UE. The UE has been described as a receiver, and the base station has been described as a transmitter, but it is not limited to such description. So, the UE may be described as a transmitter, and the base station may be described as a receiver.
Previously, a codebook for two, four, or eight antenna ports, or a codebook for a one-dimensional layout. But, for increment of usage in a wireless channel and improvement in network speed, various codebook schemes are required. To meet this requirement, the UE and the base station in the present disclosure may share a codebook for eight, twelve, and sixteen antenna ports in full dimensional MIMO (FD-MIMO) with each other.
Logical Port To Antenna Port Mapping
FIGURE 4 illustrates logical port to antenna port mapping 400 that may be employed within the wireless communication system according to some embodiments of the current disclosure. The embodiment of the port mapping illustrated in FIGURE 4 is for illustration only. However, port mappings come in a wide variety of configurations, and FIGURE 4 does not limit the scope of this disclosure to any particular implementation of a port mapping.
FIGURE 4 illustrates logical port to antenna port mapping, according to some embodiments of the current disclosure. In the figure, Tx signals on each logical port is fed into an antenna virtualization matrix (e.g., of a size Mx1), output signals of which are fed into a set of M physical antenna ports. In some embodiments, M corresponds to a total number or quantity of antenna elements on a substantially vertical axis. In other words, M corresponds to a number of physical antenna ports, S corresponds to a number of virtual antenna ports or a number of logical ports. In some embodiments, M corresponds to a ratio of a total number or quantity of antenna elements to S, on a substantially vertical axis, wherein M and S are chosen to be a positive integer.
Each element in logical ports may be mapped to each antenna element by using a precoding matrix. Signals on logical ports may be represented as a vector of size S x 1. Signals received from antenna ports may be represented as a vector of size M x 1. The precoding matrix may be represented as a vector of size M x S. In other words, the number of rows in the precoding matrix equals to the number of the antenna ports, the number of columns in the precoding matrix equals to the number of the logical ports. The number of logical ports corresponds to the number of layers. The number of layers may be referred a rank. For example, if the number of antenna ports is four and the number of transport layers is two, a size of the precoding matrix is 4 x 2 and the ranks is two.
In the present disclosure, a structure of two-dimensional codebook may be described. The total number or the quantity of antenna elements on a substantially vertical axis corresponds to one of two dimensions. As the M ports correspond to the vertical axis, it may be represented as NV=M. NV is referred as the number of antenna elements in a dimension for vertical direction. Other of the two dimensions is a dimension for horizontal direction. NH is referred as the number of antenna elements in the dimension for horizontal direction. A codebook in the present disclosure is a codebook determined based on NV and NH.
Antenna Configurations And Antenna Numbering
FIGURES 5A to 5D illustrate antenna configurations and antenna numberings according to one embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiments shown in FIGURES 5A to 5D are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In all the four antenna configurations of FIGURES 5A to 5D, a cross pol (or X-pol) antenna array is considered, in which a pair of antenna elements in a same physical location are polarized in two distinct angles, e.g., +45 degrees and -45 degrees.
FIGURES 5A and 5B are antenna configurations with 16 Channel State Information - Reference Signal (CSI-RS) ports, comprising 8 pairs of x-pol antenna elements placed in a 2D antenna panel. The 8 pairs can be placed in 2x4 (FIGURE 5A) or 4x2 manner (FIGURE 5B) on horizontal and vertical dimensions.
FIGURES 5C and 5D are antenna configurations with 12 CSI-RS ports, comprising 6 pairs of x-pol antenna elements placed in a 2D antenna panel. The 6 pairs can be placed in 2x3 (FIGURE 5C) or 3x2 manner (FIGURE 5D) on horizontal and vertical dimensions.
Antenna Number Assignment
In FIGURES 5A to 5D, antennas are indexed with integer numbers, 0, 1, …, 15 for 16-port configurations (FIGURES 5A and 5B), and 0, …, 11 for 12-port configurations (FIGURES 5C and 5D). FIGURE 5A illustrates configuration A in 16-port, FIGURE 5B illustrates configuration B in 16-port. FIGURE 5C illustrates configuration A in 12-port, FIGURE 5D illustrates configuration B in 12-port.
In wide arrays (such as 12-port config A and 16-port config A), antenna numbers are assigned as follows. Consecutive numbers are assigned for all the antenna elements for a first polarization, and proceed to a second polarization. The first polarization and the second polarization indicates each element in cross (X) pols. In the following description, the first polarization is described as a pole tilted to a right side by 45 degrees, the second polarization is described as a pole tilted a left side by 45 degrees, but various embodiments are not limited in the description. And, for a given polarization, Numbering scheme 1: consecutive numbers are assigned for a first row with progressing one edge to another edge, and proceed to a second row; and Numbering scheme 2: consecutive numbers are assigned for a first column with progressing one edge to another edge, and proceed to a second column.
For example, in FIGURE 5A, antenna numbers 0-7 are assigned for a first polarization, and 8-15 are assigned for a second polarization; and antenna numbers 0-3 are assigned for a first row and 4-7 are assigned for a second row.
Antenna numbers in tall arrays (such as 12-port config B and 16-port config B) are obtained by simply rotating the wide antenna arrays (such as 12-port config A and 16-port config A) by 90 degrees. A precoder codebook using a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) matrix is preferred in cross (X) pols shown in FIGURE 5.
PMI Feedback Precoder Generation according to the Antenna Numbering
In some embodiments, when a UE is configure with 12 or 16 port CSI-RS for a CSI-RS resource, the UE is configured to report a Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) feedback precoder according to the antenna numbers in FIGURES 5A to 5D. A rank-1 precoder, Wm,n,p , which is an NCSIRSx1 vector, to be reported by the UE has the following form:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000001
wherein:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000002
Here, example set of oversampling factors that can be configured for SN and SM are {2,4,8}; and m, m' ∈ {0,1,…, SMM}, and n, n' ∈ {0,1,…, SNN}. In a special case, m = m' and n = n'.
FIGURE 6 illustrates a precoding weight application to antenna configurations of FIGURES 5A to 5D for numbering scheme 1. An oversampling factor may be referred as an oversampling rate. The oversampling factor is an oversampling factor for DFT.
In the equation 1,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000003
may represent Kronecker product. The equation 1 may be expressed by using vm,n, instead of
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000004
in the equation 1. The equation 1 is expressed as following:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000005
, where
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000006
represents
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000007
, as described above.
When any of 16-port config A and B for Numbering scheme 1 is used at the eNB with configuring NCSIRS=16 to the UE, a submatrix
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000008
of Wm,n,p corresponds to a precoder applied on 8 co-pol elements, whose antenna numbers are 0 through 7. Given the antenna configuration, M = 2 and N = 4 should be configured for vm and un .
If 16-port config A is used, un is a 4x1 vector representing a horizontal DFT beam and vm is a 2x1 vector representing a vertical DFT beam. If 16-port config B is used, un is a 4x1 vector representing a vertical DFT beam and vm is a 2x1 vector representing a horizontal DFT beam.
With 12 or 16-port configurations, vm can be written as
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000009
.
With 16-port configurations, un can be written as:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000010
.
With 12-port configurations, un can be written as:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000011
.
Precoding weights to be applied to antenna port numbers 0 through 3 are un , and the precoding weights to be applied to antenna ports 4 through 7 are
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000012
with an appropriate power normalization factor. Similarly, precoding weights to be applied to antenna port numbers 8 through 11 are un', and the precoding weights to be applied to antenna ports 12 through 15 are
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000013
with an appropriate power normalization factor. This method of precoding weight application for Numbering scheme 1 is illustrated in FIGURES 5A to 5D. Note that the method is also applicable to Numbering scheme 2.
FIGURE 7 illustrates a 4x4 dual-polarized antenna array 700 with antenna port (AP) indexing 1 and FIGURE 8 is the same 4x4 dual-polarized antenna array 800 with antenna port indexing (AP) indexing 2.
In certain embodiments, each labelled antenna element is logically mapped onto a single antenna port. In general, one antenna port can correspond to multiple antenna elements (physical antennas) combined via a virtualization. This 4x4 dual polarized array can then be viewed as 16x2 = 32-element array of elements. The vertical dimension (consisting of 4 rows) facilitates elevation beamforming in addition to the azimuthal beamforming across the horizontal dimension (consisting of 4 columns of dual polarized antennas).
An antenna array 700 may be numbered according to indexing 1. The antenna array 700 may be numbered in a horizontal direction for a certain polarization. The antenna array 700 may be numbered by changing a row after a fourth column of the antenna array 700 is numbered. The antenna array 700 may be numbered for another polarization in a first row after an antenna of a second row and a fourth column in the antenna array 700 is numbered. After all antennas of the second row are numbered, a third row and a fourth row may be numbered as this way for the first row and the second row.
An Antenna array 800 may be numbered according to indexing 2. The antenna array 800 nay be numbered in a vertical direction for a certain polarization. The antenna array 800 may be numbered by changing a row after a fourth column of the antenna array 800 is numbered. After all antennas for a certain polarization in the antenna array 800 is numbered, antennas for another polarization in the antenna array 800 may be numbered in the same way. Embodiments shown in FIGURE 7 and FIGURE 8 are for illustration only. Another indexing scheme may be used for numbering antennas.
MIMO precoding in Rel.12 LTE standardization (per TS36.211 sections 6.3.4.2 and 6.3.4.4; and TS36.213 section 7.2.4) was largely designed to offer a precoding gain for one-dimensional antenna array. While fixed beamforming (i.e. antenna virtualization) can be implemented across the elevation dimension, it is unable to reap the potential gain offered by the spatial and frequency selective nature of the channel.
FIGURE 9 illustrates another numbering of TX antenna elements 900 (or TXRU(transceiver unit) according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 9 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In certain embodiments, eNB is equipped with 2D rectangular antenna array (or TXRUs), comprising M rows and N columns with P=2 polarized, wherein each element (or TXRU) is indexed with (m, n, p), and m = 0, …, M-1, n = 0, …, N-1, p = 0, …, P-1, as illustrated in FIGURE 9 with M=N=4. When the example shown in FIGURE 7 represents a TXRU array, a TXRU can be associated with multiple antenna elements. In one example (1-dimensional (1D) subarray partition), an antenna array comprising a column with a same polarization of a 2D rectangular array is partitioned into M groups of consecutive elements, and the M groups correspond to the M TXRUs in a column with a same polarization in the TXRU array in FIGURE 9. In later embodiments, (M,N) is sometimes denoted as (NH, NV) or (N1, N2) .
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with a CSI-RS resource comprising Q=MNP number of CSI-RS ports, wherein the CSI-RS resource is associated with MNP number of resource elements (REs) in a pair of Physical Resource Blocks (PRBs) in a subframe.
In some embodiments, the number of polarization is two. If (M, N) is expressed as (N1, N2), the number of CSI-RS ports may be expressed 2·N1·N2.
CSI-RS AND CSI FEEDBACK CONFIGURATION
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with a CSI-RS configuration via higher layer, configuring Q antenna ports - antenna ports A(1) through A(Q). The UE is further configured with CSI reporting configuration via higher layer in association with the CSI-RS configuration.
In 3GPP LTE system or LTE-A system, it is defined that the UE reports Channel State Information (CSI) to the base station. The CSI indicates information associated with a quality of a wireless link or a wireless channel formed between the UE and the base station. The CSI may comprise a rank indicator (RI), a precoding matrix indicator (PMI), a channel quality indicator (CQI). The RI indicates information associated with a rank for channel, and represents the number of streams received by the UE through a resource. The PMI is a value reflected spatial characteristic for the channel, and indicates an index of precoder that the UE prefers. The CQI is a value indicating a strength of the channel. If the base station uses the PMI, the CQI may be represent Signal-to-Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) of received signals.
The CSI reporting configuration includes information element (IE) indicating the CSI-RS decomposition information or component PMI port configuration. The information element may comprise at least two integers, say N1 and N2, which respectively indicates a first number of antenna ports for a first dimension, and a second number of antenna ports for a second dimension, wherein Q = N1·N2.
All numbers of CSI-RS ports Q associates with M·N·P, as described above. M corresponds to the number of TXRUs in the first dimension, N corresponds to the number of TXRUs in the second dimension. In addition to this way, a scheme to consider with M and P together or with N and P together may be suggested. In other words, M·P corresponds to N1, and N corresponds to N2, or N·P corresponds to N1, and M corresponds to N2.
One example method of indicating the CSI-RS decomposition (or component PMI port configuration) is described below.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000014
Another example method of indicating the PMI reporting decomposition is to explicitly configure Q and N1, and implicitly configure N2.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000015
Another example method of indicating the PMI reporting decomposition is to explicitly configure N1 and N2, and implicitly configure Q.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000016
Another example method of indicating the PMI reporting decomposition is to explicitly configure M, N, and P, and implicitly configure Q.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000017
When the UE is configured with (N1, N2), the UE calculates CQI with a composite precoder constructed with two-component codebooks, N1-Tx codebook (codebook 1) and N2-Tx codebook (codebook 2). When W1 and W2 are respectively are precoders of codebook 1 and codebook 2, the composite precoder (of size P × (rank), where P= N N2) is the (columnwise) Kronecker product of the two,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000018
. If PMI reporting is configured, the UE will report at least two component PMI corresponding to selected pair of W1 and W2 .
In one method, either W1 or W2 is further decomposed according to the double codebook structure. For example, W1 is further decomposed into:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000019
if rank 1; and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000020
if rank 2,
wherein p1 and p2 are normalization factors to make total transmission power 1, vm is an m-th DFT vector out of a (N1/2)-Tx DFT codebook with oversampling factor o1, and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000021
is a co-phase. Furthermore, the index m, m', n determines the precoder W1.
If the transmission rank is one (or number of transmission layers is one), then CQI will be derived with
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000022
; and if the transmission rank is two, then CQI will be derived with
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000023
.
In one example of this method, N1 = 8 and N2 = 4, and the TXRUs (or the antenna ports) are numbered according to FIGURE 8. In this case, W1 is further decomposed into:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000024
if rank 1; and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000025
if rank 2,
wherein vm is an m-th DFT vector out of a 4-Tx DFT codebook with oversampling factor 8; and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000026
. Furthermore, with one transmission layer, CQI will be derived with precoder
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000027
; and with two transmission layer, CQI will be derived with precoder
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000028
.
In another method, both W1 and W2 are further decomposed according to the double codebook structure with two stages. The first stage codebook is used to represent WB (Wide-Band) and long-term channel, and the second stage codebook is used to represent SB (Sub-Band) and short-term channel. For example, W1 and W2 can be decomposed as W1=
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000029
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000030
and W2=
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000031
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000032
, respectively, where:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000033
In a special case, uniformly-spaced beams are consecutively-spaced beams.
A beam grouping scheme is defined in terms of two groups of parameters, one group per dimension. A group of parameters for dimension d comprises at least one of the following parameters: a number of antenna ports Nd; an oversampling factor od; a skip number sd; a beam offset number fd; and a number of beams Ld.
In some embodiments, a beam group indicated by a first PMI i1,d of dimension d (corresponding to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000034
), is determined based upon these five parameters.
The total number of beams is Nd ·od; and the beams are indexed by an integer md, wherein beam md,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000035
, corresponds to a precoding vector
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000036
, md=0,…, Nd ·od -1.
The first PMI of the dimension d, i1,d, i1,d = 0, …, Nd· od/ sd -1, can indicate any of Ld beams indexed by: md = fd +sd ·i1,d, fd +sd·i1,d+1, …, fd +sd ·i1,d+Ld-1. These Ld beams are referred to as a beam group in dimension d.
In some embodiments, a UE may be configured via higher layers (e.g., Radio Resource Control (RRC)) with at least one of these five parameters, wherein a subset of parameters not configured in the same configuration may have been pre-configured at the UE.
In one example, a UE is configured via higher layers with an oversampling factor o2 for the second dimension in an RRC configuration, who is also pre-configured with all the other parameters: For the first dimension: N1 = 8, o1 = 8, s1 = 2, f1 = 0, and L1 = 4; and For the second dimension: N2 = 4, s2 = 2, f2 = 0, and L2 = 4;
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000037
In this case, the beams in the beam group indicated by the first PMI of the first dimension, i1,1, is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000038
, m1 = 2i1,1, 2i1,1+1, 2i1,1+2, 2i1,1+3; and
the beams in the beam group indicated by the first PMI of the second dimension, i1,2, is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000039
,m2 = 2i1,2, 2i1,2+1, 2i1,2+2, 2i1,2+3.
In a special case of o2 = 1, there is only one group of size L2 = 4, which is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000040
,m2 = 0, 1, 2, 3. In this special case, the UE does not (need to) report i1,2.
In another example, a UE is configured via higher layers with two numbers of beams, L1 and L2 respectively for the first and the second dimension in an RRC configuration, who is also pre-configured with all the other parameters. For the first dimension: N1 = 8, o1 = 8, s1 = 2, f1 = 0; and for the second dimension: N2 = 4, o2 = 4, s2 = 2, f1 = 0.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000041
In this case, the beams in the beam group indicated by the first PMI of the first dimension, i1,1, is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000042
, m1 = 2i1,1, …, 2i1,1+L1-1; and
the beams in the beam group indicated by the first PMI of the second dimension, i1,2, is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000043
,m2 = 2i1,2, …, 2i1,2+L2-1.
In some embodiments, N1 = 8 and N2 = 4, and the TXRUs (or the antenna ports) are numbered according to FIGURE 8. Three illustrative beam grouping schemes, referred to as Scheme 1, Scheme 2, and Scheme 3, according to the double codebook structure are shown in FIGURES 10, 11 and 12, and the related parameters are listed in TABLE 1.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000044
In these schemes, a horizontal oversampling factor o1=8 is considered for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000045
codebook and a vertical oversampling factor o2=4 is considered for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000046
codebook. Hence, total number of beams for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000047
codebook is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000048
=32, and total number of beams for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000049
codebook is N2o2=16. FIGURES 10 to 12 illustrate these 16×32 3D beams constructed by Kronecker product of each beam vector in
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000050
codebook and each beam vector in
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000051
codebook as a 16×32 grid, wherein the 16×32 grid comprises 16×32 squares elements. Each square element corresponds to each beam.
FIGURE 10 illustrates a beam grouping scheme corresponding to Scheme 1 in TABLE 1 according to embodiment of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 10 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In Scheme 1,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000052
codebook is a set of uniformly-spaced 4 DFT beams (L1=4). In the figure, a first, a second, and a third beam groups are illustrated. The first group comprises beams corresponding to beam grids (h,v) = (0,0), (1,0), (2,0), and (3,0), where h and v refer to horizontal and vertical grid indices, respectively. The second group comprises beams corresponding to beam grids (h,v) = (2,0), (3,0), (4,0), and (5,0). The beam groups with v = 0 can be similarly constructed, and total number of beam groups with v = 0 is 16. The third group comprises beams corresponding to beam grids (h,v) = (0,1), (1,1), (2,1), and (3,1). Continuing similarly through horizontal and vertical beam directions, 16x16 = 256 beam groups are constructed. A beam group can be indicated by a log2(256) = 8 bit field. Note that in Scheme 1,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000053
corresponds to the first stage codebook in Rel. 10 8-Tx double codebook, and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000054
codebook is the set of single DFT beams (L2=1).
FIGURE 11 illustrates a beam grouping scheme 1100 corresponding to Scheme 2 in TABLE 1 according to the embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 11 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In Scheme 2,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000055
codebook is a set of uniformly-spaced 4 DFT beams (L1=4) and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000056
codebook is a set of uniformly-spaced 2 DFT beams (L1=2). In the figure, a first, a second, and a third beam groups are illustrated. The first group comprises beams corresponding to beam grids (h,v) = (0,0), (1,0), (2,0), (3,0), (0,1), (1,1), (2,1), and (3,1). The second group comprises beams corresponding to beam grids (h,v) = (2,0), (3,0), (4,0), (5,0), (2,1), (3,1), (4,1), and (5,1). The beam groups with v = 0 and 1 can be similarly constructed, and total number of beam groups with v = 0 and 1 is 16. The third group comprises beams corresponding to beam grids (h,v) = (0,2), (1,2), (2,2), (3,2), (0,3), (1,3), (2,3), and (3,3). Continuing similarly through horizontal and vertical beam directions, 16x8 = 128 beam groups are constructed. A beam group can be indicated by a log2(128) = 7 bit field. Note that in Scheme 2,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000057
corresponds to the first stage codebook in Rel. 10 8-Tx double codebook.
FIGURE 12 illustrates a beam grouping scheme 1200 corresponding to Scheme 3 in TABLE 1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 12 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In Scheme 3, both
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000058
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000059
are sets of uniformly-spaced 2 DFT beams (L1=L2=2). In the figure, a first, a second, and a third beam groups are illustrated. The first group comprises beams corresponding to beam grids (h,v) = (0,0), (1,0), (0,1), and (1,1). The second group comprises beams corresponding to beam grids (h,v) = (2,0), (3,0), (2,1), and (3,1). The beam groups with v = 0 and 1 can be similarly constructed, and total number of beam groups with v = 0 and 1 is 16. The third group comprises beams corresponding to beam grids (h,v) = (0,2), (1,2), (0,3), and (1,3). Continuing similarly through horizontal and vertical beam directions, 16x8 = 128 beam groups are constructed. A beam group can be indicated by a log2(128) = 7 bit field.
It should be noted that these codebooks are for illustration only. The method is applicable to other kinds of double codebooks.
In some embodiments, PMI indices corresponding to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000060
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000061
are WB and long-term and that corresponding to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000062
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000063
are SB and short-term. The PMI feedback payload to indicate PMI indices for the three schemes is shown in below TABLE 2. Both WB and SB components of the feedback overhead can be decomposed into two, one for azimuth and the other for elevation.
WB components: in all three schemes, a 4-bit feedback is needed to report azimuth component of the PMI index (H-PMI) corresponding to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000064
. In Scheme 1, if V-PMI is configured as a WB component, then V-PMI is reported as a 4 bit information, which corresponds to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000065
. Otherwise no WB V-PMI is reported (i.e., 0 bits for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000066
). In both Schemes 2 and 3, V-PMI is reported as a 3-bit information, which corresponds to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000067
.
SB components: in all three schemes, a 2-bit feedback is needed to report the co-phase value. To report azimuth component of the PMI index (H-PMI) corresponding to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000068
, a 2-bit indication is used in Schemes 1 and 2, and a 1-bit indication is used in Scheme 3. For elevation component of the PMI index (V-PMI) corresponding to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000069
, a 4-bit indication is used in Scheme 1 if SB V-PMI is configured, and a 1-bit feedback is used in Schemes 2 and 3.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000070
In some embodiments, the UE is configured with one first-stage codebook selected from multiple candidate first-stage codebooks, in which each first stage codebook is associated with a set of parameters defining a single beam grouping scheme such as Schemes 1, 2, and 3 in TABLE 1. In one example, a beam grouping scheme may be configured via higher-layers (e.g, RRC) according to the below; or a preferred beam grouping scheme may be reported by the UE.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000071
In some embodiments, the UE is configured with one first-stage codebook selected from multiple candidate first-stage codebooks where each first stage codebook is associated with multiple beam grouping schemes wherein example beam grouping schemes are shown in TABLE 1. In this case, the UE can more flexibly select SB PMI. For example, a UE may be configured to report a first PMI based upon the first-stage codebook, comprising beam groups constructed by Schemes 1 and 2. For this configuration, a new information element (IE) that can be configured in the higher-layer (e.g., RRC) can be designed as shown below, which indicates which of schemes 1, 2 and 3 are used for constructing beam groups for first stage codebook construction.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000072
In this case, the total number of beam groups indicated by
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000073
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000074
is determined as sum of numbers of beam groups indicated by the two schemes. For example, when schemes 1 and 3 are chosen, the total number of beam groups is 256 + 128 = 384. A UE may report a one-bit selected beam group index information, as well as the first PMIi1,1 and i1,2 for the two dimensions; in this case, the first PMI is interpreted differently according to the reported beam group index.
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with a CSI-RS configuration via higher layer, configuring two resources, wherein a first resource is used for CSI-RS transmissions of N1 antenna ports - antenna ports A(1) through A(N1), and a second resource is used for CSI-RS transmissions of N2 antenna ports - antenna ports B(1) through B(N2).
When the UE is configured with (N1, N2), the UE calculates CQI with a composite precoder constructed with two-component codebooks, N1-Tx codebook (codebook 1) and N2-Tx codebook (codebook 2). When W1 and W2 are respectively are precoders of codebook 1 and codebook 2, the composite precoder (of size P × (rank), wherein P = N1 · N2 ) is the Kronecker product of the two,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000075
. If PMI reporting is configured, the UE will report two component PMI corresponding to selected pair of W1 and W2 . The signals formed with the composite precoder is assumed to be transmitted on antenna ports C(1), …, C(P) for the purpose of deriving CQI index. The UE may also assume that reference signals on antenna ports C(1), …, C(P) are constructed by a Kronecker product of reference signals on A(1), …, A(N1) and reference signals on B(1), …, B(N2). In other words: [C(1), …, C(P)]t = [A(1), …, A(N1)]t
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000076
[B(1), …, B(N2)]t.
Relation of Composite Precoder to Antenna Ports
In some embodiments, for the purpose of deriving CQI index, and PMI and RI (if configured), the UE may assume the following:
The Physical Downlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH) signals on antenna ports
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000077
would result in signals equivalent to corresponding symbols transmitted on antenna ports {15,...,14+P}, as given by
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000078
, where
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000079
is a vector of symbols from the layer mapping in subclause 6.3.3.2 of 3GPP TS 36.211, P is the number of antenna ports of the associated CSI-RS resource, and if P=1, W(i) is 1, otherwise W(i) , of size P ×
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000080
, is the precoding matrix corresponding to the reported PMI applicable to x(i). The corresponding PDSCH signals transmitted on antenna ports {15...14+P} would have a ratio of EPRE to CSI-RS Energy Per Resource Element (EPRE) equal to the ratio given in subclause 3GPP TS 36.213.
In some embodiments, a codebook is defined for antenna port number 15 to 22 or antenna port number 15 to 26 or antenna port number 15 to 30. In other words, the codebook is defined for 8, 12, or 16 antenna ports. In other embodiments, a codebook is defined for antenna port number 15 to 14 + P. P may be a positive integer. In other words, the codebook is defined for P antenna ports.
8-Tx Double Codebook
TABLE 3 and TABLE 4 are codebooks for rank-1 and rank-2 (1-layer and 2-layer) CSI reporting for UEs configured with 8 Tx antenna port transmissions. To determine a CW (CodeWord) for each codebook, two indices, i.e., i1 and i2 have to be selected. In these precoder expressions, the following two variables are used:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000081
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000082
If the most recently reported RI = 1, m and n are derived with the two indices i1 and i2 according to TABLE 3, resulting in a rank-1 precoder,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000083
.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000084
If the most recently reported RI = 2, m, m' and n are derived with the two indices i1 and i2 according to TABLE 4, resulting in a rank-2 precoder,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000085
. It is noted that
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000086
is constructed such that it can be used for two different types of channel conditions that facilitate a rank-2 transmission.
One subset of the codebook associated with i2 = {0, 1, …, 7} comprises codewords with m = m', or the same beams (vm ) are used for constructing the rank-2 precoder:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000087
. In this case, the two columns in the 2-layer precoder are orthogonal (i.e.,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000088
=0), owing to the different signs applied to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000089
for the two columns. These rank-2 precoders are likely to be used for those UEs that can receive strong signals along two orthogonal channels generated by the two differently polarized antennas.
FIGURE 13 illustrates a new codebook construction 1300 according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 13 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In the embodiment, the new codebook construction is constructed for P=16 antenna ports comprising N1=8 and N2=2. For each group of APs corresponding to each row (i.e., {0, 1, …7} and {8, 9, …, 15}, the channels are quantized with two indices i1,1 and i2,1, according to the 8-Tx double codebook. It is noted that the antenna (TXRU) numbering system in this example is aligned with FIGURE 5A.
A co-phasing vector to apply for the two rows is constructed with a new index k, and is equal to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000090
. The resulting precoders
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000091
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000092
when the most recently reported RI is 1 and 2 are:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000093
if RI = 1;
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000094
if RI = 2.
It is noted that the precoders when the most recently reported RI is > 2 can also be similarly constructed with applying a co-phasing vector.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000095
where it is clarified that
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000096
is indeed a Kronecker product of
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000097
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000098
.
In one method,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000099
, k=0,1,2,3, which is uniformly sampling the range of [0, 2π]. In this case, the rank-1 and rank-2 precoders are constructed as:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000100
.
In another method,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000101
,k=0,1,2,3, which is uniformly sampling the range of [0, π]. This method is motivated by the fact that it would be sufficient to consider the range of [0, π] for quantizing the elevation (or zenith) angle, when azimuth angle spans [0, 2π] In this case, the rank-1 and rank-2 precoders are constructed as:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000102
.
FIGURE 14 illustrates another new codebook construction according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 14 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
The codebook construction is the same as FIGURE 13, except for the second column of the composite 16-Tx rank-2 precoder. According to this construction, the rank-2 precoder matrix is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000103
,
where
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000104
, k=0,1,2,3 or
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000105
, k=0,1,2,3 .
FIGURE 15 illustrates a new codebook construction for P=32 antenna ports comprising N1=8 and N2=4, according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 15 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
The codebook is constructed under the same principle as FIGURE 13. In this case, the co-phasing to be applied to the four rows is a 4x1 vector,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000106
=[1 uk u2k u3k]t , where
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000107
, k=0,1,2,3 or
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000108
, k=0,1,2,3. In this case, the rank-1 and rank-2 precoder is constructed as:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000109
.
Similarly, a new codebook can be constructed according to the same principle as in FIGURE 13 and FIGURE 15, for arbitrary numbers of N1 and N2;
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000110
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000111
will comprise (N2 x 1) block matrices where each block corresponds to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000112
, k=0,1,2,...N2 ; and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000113
.
FIGURE 16 shows example beam patterns constructed with [1 uk u2k u3k]t and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000114
, k=0,1,2,3, where antennas are spaced apart by 1.28λ in the vertical domain. The figure shows that the elevation angle range of 90° to 115° are well-covered, the range of which corresponds to typical user elevation angle distribution.
Polarization-Specific V Beams
FIGURE 17 illustrates an alternate codebook construction 1700 in which two different vertical beams may be applied for the two polarizations according to the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 17 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In this exemplary figure, we have P=16 antenna ports comprising N1=8 and N2=2. For each group of APs corresponding to each row (i.e., {0, 1, …7} and {8, 9, …, 15}, the channels are quantized with two indices i1 and i2, according to the 8-Tx double codebook. It is noted that the antenna (TXRU) numbering system in this example is aligned with FIGURE 5A.
Two co-phasing vectors or vertical beams to apply for the two rows are constructed with two new indices k1 and k2, and are equal to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000115
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000116
. The first vertical beam
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000117
is applied to antenna ports with one polarization, shown as solid lines, and the second vertical beam
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000118
is applied to antenna ports with other polarization, shown as dashed lines. Note that the proposed idea is applicable to rank 2 (RI = 2). The resulting precoders
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000119
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000120
when the most recently reported RI is 1 and 2 are:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000121
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000122
where it is clarified that
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000123
is indeed a concatenation of two Kronecker product, one for each polarization, i.e. KP (
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000124
, vm) and KP (
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000125
,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000126
vm),
It is noted that the precoders when the most recently reported RI is > 2 can also be similarly constructed with applying two vertical co-phasing vectors.
In one method, for both l=1,2,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000127
, k=0,1,2,3, which is uniformly sampling the range of [0, 2π]. In this case, the rank-1 and rank-2 precoders are constructed as:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000128
In another method, for both l=1,2,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000129
, kl=0,1,2,3, which is uniformly sampling the range of [0, π]. This method is motivated by the fact that it would be sufficient to consider the range of [0, π] for quantizing the elevation (or zenith) angle, when azimuth angle spans [0, 2π] In this case, the rank-1 and rank-2 precoders are constructed as:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000130
In another method, the configuration for two vertical beams allows them to be either identical or adjacent. For example, for both l=1,2 with either
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000131
or
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000132
,(k1,k2) values are jointly selected from TABLE 5. Note that compared to the previous two methods where 4-bit indication is needed (k1,k2) feedback, a 3-bit indication is needed in this method.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000133
In another method, when N2 = 4 and we have a double vertical codebook with oversampling factor o2=4 and four beams in a group represented by the first stage vertical codebook (L2=4), then (k1,k2) is derived based on TABLE 6, which is similar to indices m and m’ in rank 2 8-Tx codebook (TABLE 4). Note that here (k1,k2) corresponds to indices of two 4-Tx DFT beams from the first stage vertical codebook.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000134
Note that the two vertical beam idea is general and hence is applicable to other antenna port configurations such as the ones shown in FIGURE 13 and FIGURE 14.
PMI Feedback Indices: WB V-PMI
A UE can be configured to report three PMI indices, i1, i2, and i3, for informing eNB of m, m', n, k, used for constructing a precoder according to a codebook construction associated with FIGURE 13 or FIGURE 14 or FIGURE 15. In one method, i1, i2 correspond to precoders
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000135
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000136
according to the relation in TABLE 3 and TABLE 4 respectively for the cases of RI=1 and RI=2; and i3 is mapped to k according to relation of k = i3.
As k = i3 is essentially a vertical beam index, which may not change quickly over time and frequency. Hence, it is proposed to jointly feedback i1 and i3 in PUCCH feedback modes.
Figure 18 illustrates PUCCH mode 1-1 submode 1 according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 18 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In the embodiment, a UE is configured with PUCCH feedback mode 1-1 submode 1. Then, the UE reports RI, i1 and i3 in RI reporting instances, and the UE reports i2 and corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances. This is illustrated in FIGURE 18, where i1, i2 and i3 are denoted as W1, W2 and W3.
For the joint encoding of RI, i1 and i3, two methods are designed in TABLE 7 and TABLE 8. In one method illustrated in TABLE 7, the numbers of states for RI=1 and RI=2 case are both 8, the same as Rel-10 8-Tx codebook. To jointly encode i1 and i3 , it is proposed to uniformly subsample i1 with sampling factor 4, and uniformly subsample i3 with subsampling factor 2. In this case, the joint coding index 0, 1, … and 7 for RI/PMI1/PMI3 that is for RI=1, would correspond to ( i1,i3 ) = (0, 0), (0, 1), (4, 0), (4, 1), (8, 0), (8, 1), (12, 0) and (12, 1).
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000137
In another method illustrated in TABLE 8, the numbers of states for RI=1 and RI=2 case are both 16, double the corresponding number of states in Rel-10 8-Tx codebook. To jointly encode i1 and i3, it is proposed to uniformly subsample i1 with sampling factor 4, but not to subsample i3 , in order to maintain the elevation beamforming gain. In this case, the joint coding index 0, 1, … and 15 for RI/PMI1/PMI3 that is for RI=1, would correspond to ( i1,i3 ) = (0, 0), (0, 1), (0, 2), (0, 3), (4, 0), (4, 1), (4, 2), (4, 3), (8, 0), (8, 1), (8, 2), (8, 3), (12, 0), (12, 1), (12, 2) and (12, 3).
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000138
FIGURE 19 illustrates an UE elevation angle distribution in cellular wireless systems, in urban macro (UMa) and urban micro (UMi) cases. The elevation angle (
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000139
) is defined in such a way that to the zenith is zero degree, and to the horizon is 90 degrees. In most cases, base station serves UEs below the base station antennas, in which case the elevation angle is 90 degrees or larger. This intuition is verified by simulation results, as shown on the right side of FIGURE 19. As for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000140
precoders, [1 1] and [1 j] are most frequently chosen, each of which respectively corresponds to an elevation angle of 90 degrees and an angle between 90 degrees and 180 degrees. In some embodiments, the
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000141
codebook comprises two precoders:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000142
, so that UE can recommend one of the two elevation steering angles of
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000143
=90° and 90°<
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000144
< 180°.
In some embodiments,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000145
codebook comprises four precoders as in other embodiments of the current disclosure, and a UE can report a codebook index out of k=0, 1, 2, 3 when the PMI is reported on PUSCH. When the PMI is reported on PUCCH and when a certain feedback mode is configured, a UE reports a codebook index out of a subsampled set.
In one method, the subsampled set corresponds to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000146
, so that UE can recommend one of the two elevation steering angles of
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000147
=90° and 90°<
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000148
< 180°.
In another method, the subsampled set corresponds to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000149
, so that UE can recommend one of the two precoders separated farthest in the angular domain. This method can improve MU-MIMO throughput, when eNB receives PMI constructed according to this method and applies the recommended precoders in the MU-MIMO transmissions.
In another method, the subsampled set is higher-layer configured, e.g., between
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000150
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000151
.
PMI Feedback Indices: SB V-PMI
A UE can be configured to report three PMI indices, i1, i2, and i3, for informing eNB of m, m', n, k, used for constructing a precoder according to a codebook construction associated with FIGURE 13 or FIGURE 14 or FIGURE 15. In one method, i1, i2 correspond to precoders
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000152
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000153
according to the relation in TABLE 3 and TABLE 4 respectively for the cases of RI=1 and RI=2; and i3 is mapped to k according to relation of k = i3.
To adapt to the fast variation in the vertical channel directions, the vertical beam index k = i3 may need to reported per SB. It is therefore proposed to jointly feedback i2 and i3 in PUCCH feedback modes.
FIGURES 20 to 22 illustrate three examples of PUCCH mode 1-1 submode 1 2000, 2100, and 2200 according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiments shown in FIGURES 20 to 22 are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In the embodiments, a UE is configured with PUCCH feedback mode 1-1 submode 1. Then, the UE reports RI and i1 in RI reporting instances, and the UE reports i2, i3, and corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances. This is illustrated in FIGURE 20, where i1, i2 and i3 are denoted as W1, W2 and W3.
PMI Feedback Indices: Double Structure
A UE can be configured to report four PMI indices, i1,1, i2,1, i1,2, and i2,2 corresponding to codebooks
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000154
,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000155
,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000156
, and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000157
, respectively according to some embodiments of this disclosure. The eNB uses them for constructing a precoder according to a codebook construction associated with FIGURE 13 or FIGURE 14 or FIGURE 15, where index k is derived from i1,2 and i2,2. In one method, i1,1, i2,1 correspond to precoders and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000159
according to the relation in TABLE 3 and TABLE 4 respectively for the cases of RI=1 and RI=2; and i1,2 and i2,2 are mapped to k according to relation of k = s2i1,2 + i2,2, wherein s2 (e.g., s2=2) is a skipping number for the second dimension, and i2,2=0, 1, …, L2-1.
According to the double codebook structure, it is proposed to jointly feedback (i1, i3) and (i2, i4) in PUCCH feedback modes.
In one embodiment, a UE is configured with PUCCH feedback mode 1-1 submode 1. Then, the UE reports RI and (i1, i3) in RI reporting instances, and the UE reports (i2, i4), and corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances. This is illustrated in FIGURE 21, where i1, i2, i3, and i4 are denoted as W1, W2, W3 and W4.
In another embodiment, a UE is configured with PUCCH feedback mode 1-1 submode 1. Then, the UE reports RI and (i1,1, i1,2) in RI reporting instances, and the UE reports (i2,1, i2,2), and i2,1 alternatively together with the corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances. Note that in this mode, if the number of feedback bits in PMI/CQI reporting instances is fixed, then the UE can report a course and a fine PMI feedback for W2: W2 reported together with W4 is a course feedback and W2 reported alone is a refined feedback. This is illustrated in FIGURE 22, where i1,1, i2,1, i1,2, and i2,2 are denoted as W1, W2, W3 and W4.
In one example, i2,1 indicates one out of 4 horizontal beams and i2,2 indicates one out of 2 vertical beams (for example Scheme 2 in).
In some embodiments, total number of feedback bits in PMI/CQI reporting instances is 4, of which 2 bits are used for co-phase selection and the remaining two bits are used for selecting a composite beam, constructed by Kronecker product of a horizontal beam vector and a vertical beam vector.
In PMI/CQI reporting instances in which W2+CQI are reported, these remaining 2 bits are used to indicate one horizontal beam out of the 4 horizontal beams. This is referred to as a fine PMI because all 4 beams are considered in the PMI selection.
On the other hand, in PMI/CQI reporting instances in which W2+W4+CQI are reported, 1 bit is used to select one vertical beam out of 2 beams and 1 bit is used to select a horizontal PMI from a subsampled set of 4 horizontal beams. This is referred to as a coarse PMI because a subset of 4 beams are considered in the PMI selection. In one method (Method 1), the subsampled set corresponds to beam indices {1,2} out of four horizontal beam indices {1,2,3,4} indicated by i1. In another method (Method 2), the subsampled set corresponds to beam indices {1,3} out of four horizontal beam indices {1,2,3,4} indicated by i1.
A subsampling method may be indicated according to TABLE 9. In one method, eNB may configure the UE a subsampling method for deriving i2. In another method, the UE may feedback a selected subsampling method using a 1-bit filed. Such feedback may be WB and long-term.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000160
In another embodiment, a UE is configured with PUCCH feedback mode 1-1 submode x, as shown in FIGURE 23, for reporting i1,1, i2,1, i1,2, and i2,2 using two CSI processes: CSI processes 1 and 2. According to CSI processes 1, the UE reports RI and i1,1 in RI reporting instances, and it reports i2,1 and the corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances. Similarly, according to CSI processes 2, the UE reports RI and i1,2 in RI reporting instances, and it reports i2,2 and the corresponding CQI in PMI/CQI reporting instances.
In one method, the two RIs and CQIs in the CSI reports correspond to the joint RI and joint CQI. In another method, one of them, for example CSI report 1 includes joint RI and joint CQI, and the other report includes V-RI and V-CQI, for example. In yet another method, both or one of RI and CQI are reported only once in one of the CSI reports.
The parameterized KP double codebook described above is summarized as follows.
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with a CSI-RS configuration via higher layer, configuring Q antenna ports - antenna ports A(1) through A(Q). The UE is further configured with CSI reporting configuration via higher layer in association with the CSI-RS configuration. The CSI reporting configuration includes information element (IE) indicating the CSI-RS decomposition information (or component PMI port configuration). The information element may comprise at least two integers, say N1 and N2, which respectively indicates a first number or quantity of antenna ports per pol for a first dimension, and a second number of antenna ports per pol for a second dimension, wherein Q = P · N1 · N2.
In some embodiments of the disclosure, the first dimension may correspond to the horizontal direction or columns, and the second dimension may correspond to the vertical direction or rows, i.e., (N1,N2) = (N,M).
In some embodiments of the disclosure, the first dimension may correspond to the vertical direction or rows, and the second dimension may correspond to the horizontal direction or columns, i.e., (N1,N2) = (M,N).
In various embodiments, downlink signaling may indicate first and second quantities of antenna ports. These first and second quantities of antenna ports indicate respective quantities of antenna ports in first and second dimensions. For example, the first quantity of antenna ports is a number or value for antenna ports in a first dimension. For example, the first dimension may be a vertical direction or rows or may be the horizontal direction or columns. In another example, the second quantity of antenna ports is a number or value for antenna ports in a second dimension. For example, the second dimension may be a vertical direction or rows or may be the horizontal direction or columns. Also, the first and second quantities of subset beams indicates respective quantities of subset beams in first and second dimensions. For example, the first quantity of subset beams is a number or value for subset beams in a first dimension.
In the rest of the disclosure, we will use notation (N1,N2) in place of (M,N) or (N,M). Similarly, we will use (O1,O2) for the oversampling factors in the two dimensions in place of ( SN,SM ) or ( SM,SN ).
In one embodiment, for each of [8], 12 and 16 Tx ports, a precoding matrix W in the codebook is represented as:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000161
where:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000162
A first alternative to construct such a codebook is as follows. Tall, [square] and wide arrays are supported with a single codebook for each of 8, 12 and 16 CSI-RS ports: For PUSCH and PUCCH reporting, a codebook subset can be separately selected via RRC signaling of codebook subset selection parameters or a bitmap; FFS beam subset selection/restriction and related mechanism; and FFS which and how the parameters (in TABLE 1) are related/configured.
A second alternative to construct such a codebook is as follows. Tall, square and wide port layouts are supported with parameters N1, N2: Values of N1 and N2 are RRC signaled. The parameters (in TABLE 10) define the codebook: Configurable oversampling factors, RRC signaled, values FFS; Other parameters are to be determined; FFS beam subset selection/restriction and related mechanism.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000163
A beam grouping scheme and a codebook can be defined in terms of two groups of parameters, one group per dimension. A group of parameters for dimension d comprises at least one of the following parameters: a number of antenna ports per pol Nd; an oversampling factor Od; a skip number (or beam group spacing) sd (for W1); a beam offset number fd; a beam spacing number pd (for W2); and a number of beams (in each beam group) Ld.
A beam group indicated by a first PMI i1,d of dimension d (corresponding to
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000164
), is determined based upon these six parameters. The total number of beams is N od; and the beams are indexed by an integer md, wherein beam md,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000165
, corresponds to a precoding vector
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000166
, md=0,…, N Od -1. The first PMI of the first dimension i1,d, i1,d = 0, …, NOd/ sd -1, can indicate any of Ld beams indexed by: md = fd +sd ·i1,d, fd +sd ·i1,d+ pd, …, fd +sd ·i1,d+(Ld-1)pd, where these Ld beams are referred to as a beam group.
In one example, N1 = 4 and N2 = 4. Three illustrative beam grouping schemes, referred to as Scheme 1, Scheme 2, and Scheme 3, according to the double codebook structure are shown in FIGURE 4, FIGURE 5 and FIGURE 6, and the parameters are listed in TABLE 11. The beam grouping schemes may be represented as at least one parameter associated with a codebook configuration.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000167
FIGURES 24 to 26 illustrates respective beam grouping schemes 1, 2 and 3 according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiments shown in FIGURES 24 to 26 are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In some embodiments, the scheme is determined according to antenna (port) dimension parameters (N1, N2), where N1 and N2 are configured by the higher layer (i.e. RRC). In one example, if a UE is configured with (N1, N2) = (8,1), scheme 1 is configured; if the UE is configured (4,2), on the other hand, scheme 2 is configured.
In these schemes, a horizontal oversampling factor O1=8 is considered for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000168
codebook and a vertical oversampling factor O2=4 is considered for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000169
codebook. Hence, total number of beams for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000170
codebook is N1O1=32, and total number of beams for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000171
codebook is N2O2=16. FIGURES 24 to 26 illustrate these 16×32 3D beams constructed by Kronecker product of each beam vector in
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000172
codebook and each beam vector in
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000173
codebook as a 16×32 grid, wherein each square correspond to a beam.
The focus of this disclosure is on the details of configuring KP codebook based on the codebook parameters: (Nd, Od, sd, fd, pd, Ld) where d=1,2.
In some embodiments: the UE is configured with a parameterized KP codebook corresponding to the codebook parameters (Nd, Od, sd, fd, pd, Ld) where d=1,2 from a master codebook by applying codebook subset selection. The master codebook is a large codebook with default codebook parameters.
In one method, the master codebook may be unique. In another method, there may be multiple master codebooks and the UE may be configured with at least one master codebook from the multiple master codebooks. An example of multiple master codebooks may be based on beam offset numbers f1 and f2 as shown in the table below. In this example, a 1-bit indication may be used to indicate the master codebook via higher layer such as RRC.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000174
For simplicity, it is assumed that f1 = f2 = 0 (Mater codebook 0) in the rest of the disclosure. However, the disclosure is applicable to other values of f1 and f2.
An example of master codebook parameters for Q = 8, 12, 16, and 32 antenna ports (L1,L2) = (4,4) are tabulated in TABLE 13. It is noted that Q = MNP in TABLE 13.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000175
In some embodiments, the beam grouping and beam skipping parameters (s1, s2, p1, and p2) of the master codebook are fixed and hence are not configured. For example, they are fixed to s1= s2 = 2, and p1= p2 = 1.
In some embodiments, the master codebook parameters for Q = 8, 12, 16, and 32 antenna ports and (L1,L2) = (4,2) are according to TABLE 14, where multiple oversampling factors in two dimension are supported. The remaining codebook parameters may be fixed, for example, s1= s2 = 2, and p1= p2 = 1.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000176
The oversampling factor in one or both dimensions is configurable according to the below table.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000177
In some embodiments, the master codebook parameters for Q = 8, 12, 16, and 32 antenna ports and (L1,L2) = (4,2) are according to TABLE 15, where single oversampling factors in two dimension are supported. The remaining codebook parameters may be fixed, for example, s1= s2 = 2, and p1= p2 = 1.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000178
In some embodiments, the UE may be configured with one of multiple beam grouping schemes or (L1,L2) value. Depending on the configured (L1,L2), the other codebook parameters such as beam skipping parameters (s1,s2) are determined by the UE. For example, when the UE is configured with (L1,L2) = (4,2), then UE determines s1= s2 = 2, and when the UE is configured with (L1,L2) = (1,1), then UE determines s1= s2 = 1. The number of W1 bits for the former, i.e., (L1,L2) = (4,2), is log2(O1N1/2) + log2(O2N2/2), whereas it is log2(O1N1) + log2(O2N2) for the later (i.e., (L1,L2) = (1,1)), which is correspond to 2 more bits than the former.
FIGURE 27 illustrates a master codebook 2700 with example beam groups for N1 = 4 and N2 = 4 according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 27 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
An example of the master codebook is a fine DFT codebook that is obtained by performing the KP of azimuth (1st dimension) and elevation (2nd dimension) DFT codebooks with large oversampling factors. For example, as shown in the figure, the oversampling factor may be 8 in azimuth dimension, i.e., O1 = 8 and it may be 4 in elevation dimension, i.e., O2 = 4. An example of the master codebook for N1 = 4 azimuth antenna ports and N2 = 4 elevation antenna ports is shown in FIGURE 27. As shown, there are N1O1 = 32 azimuth DFT beams indexed by h = 0,1,2,…,31 and N2O2 = 16 elevation DFT beams indexed by v = 0,1,2,…,15. So, the total number of 2D DFT beams that are obtained by the KP of the azimuth and elevation DFT codebooks is 32 x 16 = 512.
From this 2D grid of DFT beams, beam groups of a default size are formed. An example of default size of beam groups is (L1, L2) = (4, 4) as in FIGURE 27. The beam groups are formed based on all possible values of s1 and s2. The set of all beam groups constitutes the master W1 codebook. A few example beam group for s1 = 1 and s2 = 1 are shown in FIGURE 27 7 as shaded squares.
From these beam groups of default size, the beam selection and co-phasing are performed to construct pre-coding matrices corresponding to different number of layers v = 1, 2, 3…8. For example, for v = 1, one beam is selected from the 16 beams in a beam group and a co-phasing
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000179
is applied from the Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) co-phasing codebook = {1,j,-1,-j} to form a pre-coding vector (as shown in FIGURE 27 for beam a0,0). The set of pre-coding matrices that are constructed in this manner constitute the master W2 codebook.
In some embodiments, the master codebook is represented as a set of master sub-codebooks where each master sub-codebook corresponds to a unique set of codebook parameters (Nd, od, sd, pd) where d=1,2. For example, for the master codebooks in TABLE 13, the master sub-codebooks may map to the codebook parameters according to the following TABLE 16. For simplicity, in the table, parameters (Nd, od) where d=1,2, are not shown since they take single values according to TABLE 13.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000180
In some embodiments, TABLE 17 is used as a rank-1 (1 layer) master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein the corresponding rank 1 precoder is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000181
. In this table, the 1st dimension beam index m1 increases first as i2 increases.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000182
In some embodiments, TABLE 18 is used as a rank-1 (1 layer) master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein the corresponding rank 1 precoder is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000183
. In this table, the 2nd dimension beam index m2 increases first as i2 increases.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000184
In some embodiments, the UE reports i2,1, i2,2 and n in place of i2, in which case m1 and m2 are determined as: m1=s1i1,1 + i2,1 and m2=s2i1,2 + i2,2.
In those embodiments related to TABLE 17 and TABLE 18, and other related embodiments, the parameters s1, s2, p1, and p2 in this table can be selected, e.g., according to TABLE 13, and it is assumed that L1 = L2 = 4. Also i1,1=0,1,...,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000185
and i 1,2=0,1,...,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000186
.
The master codebook for other parameters and for more than 1 layer can be similarly constructed.
Unified Codebook For Beamformed and Non-Precoded CSI-RS
In some embodiments,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000187
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000188
to comprise a precoder
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000189
, are differently configured depending on whether beamformed CSI-RS, or non-precoded CSI-RS or both are configured.
In one such example with Q = 16 and N1 = 8 and N2 = 2:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000190
Herein
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000191
, m = 0, 1, …, N-1, is an Nx1 column vector comprising with (N-1) elements with zero value and one element with value of one. The one element with value of one is on (m+1)-th row. For example,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000192
=[0 1 0 0]t; and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000193
=[0 0 1 0]t. In this case, the UE is further configured to use i1,1 = i1,2 = 0 in the table entries, and the UE is configured to report only i2 as PMI, and not to report i1,1 and i1,2.
As described below,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000194
is expressed
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000195
as instead of Kronecker Product. A characteristic of the Kronecker Product and descriptions,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000196
may be expressed generally as
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000197
where
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000198
The precoding vector obtained with Alt 2 can be applied on the antenna ports numbered according to FIGURES 7 and 8. In these embodiments, the first dimension corresponds to a longer dimension of the array; and the second dimension corresponds to a shorter dimension of the array. On the contrary, the precoding vector obtained with Alt 1 can be applied on the antenna ports numbered in such a way that the first dimension corresponds to a shorter dimension of the array; and the second dimension corresponds to a longer dimension of the array.
In some embodiments, the UE can identify that a configured CSI-RS resource is beamformed or non-precoded by:
Alt 1. Explicit RRC indication: The UE is configured with a higher-layer parameter for the configured CSI-RS resource, indicating whether the configured CSI-RS resource is beamformed or non-precoded.
Alt 2. Implicit indication: The UE is configured with a different set of CSI-RS port numbers for beamformed CSI-RS than the non-precoded CSI-RS. In one example, the beamformed CSI-RS takes antenna port numbers 200-207, while the non-precoded CSI-RS takes antenna port numbers 15-30.
Embodiments on Codebook Subset Restriction
In FD-MIMO environment, a lot of overhead may be generated because of using a double codebook. To improve this problem, Codebook Subset Restriction is described to reduce complexity for the UE and the codebook.
FIGURE 28 illustrates the subset restriction on rank-1 i1,H and i1,V (or i1,1 and i1,2) for N1 = 8, N2 = 4, o1 = 8 and o2 = 4, according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 28 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In some embodiments, the configured values of parameters (Nd, od, sd) where d=1,2 are used to apply codebook subset restriction on of the set of i1,1 and i1,2 indices from the master codebook. An illustration of subset restriction on rank-1 i1,1 and i1,2 indices in terms of parameters s1 and s2 is shown in FIGURE 28. In the figure, the shaded squares represent the rank-1 i1,1and i1,2 indices that are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included.
In some embodiments, the codebook subset restriction on i1,1 and i1,2 indices may be applied according to a table such as TABLE 19. Depending on the values of sd where d=1,2, the subsets of i1,1 and i1,2 indices can be obtained from the table. Note that s1 = s2 = 1 corresponds to no subset restriction. In these embodiments it is assumed that (i1,1 , i1,2) = (i1,H , i1,V), but the same design can apply even if (i1,1 , i1,2) = (i1,V , i1,H). As described below, P may be corresponds to the number of polarizations.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000199
An example of such a table for N1 = 8, N2 = 4, o1 = 8 and o2 = 4 is shown in TABLE 20.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000200
In some embodiments, the configured values of parameters (Nd, od, sd, pd, Ld) where d=1,2 are used to apply codebook subset restriction on the set of rank-1 i2 indices from the master codebook. The codebook subset restriction may be applied from a table such as TABLE 21. Depending on the values of L1 and L2, the subset of rank-1 i2 indices can be obtained from a row of the table.
Note that L1 = L2 = 4 corresponds to no subset restriction. In refer to TABLE 21, i2 index before subset restriction and i2 index after subset restriction are same as 64. In these embodiments it is assumed that (i1,1 , i1,2) = (i1,H , i1,V), but the same design can apply even if (i1,1 , i1,2) = (i1,V , i1,H).
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000201
FIGURE 29 illustrates the example beam groups in the master codebook according to the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 29 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
The beam groups is in a size L1 = L2 = 4 with (i1,1, i1,2) = (i1,H, i1,V) = (0,0) in the master codebook. In the FIGURE 29, the four rows correspond to four different values for s1 and s2. The first column shows the corresponding 2D index map of i1,H and i1,V indices. The rest of the four columns show the beam groups with (i1,1, i1,2) = (i1,H, i1,V) = (0,0) and four different values for p1 and p2.
FIGURE 30 illustrates the subset restriction 300 on rank-1 i2 according to the embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 30 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Depending on the values of parameters L1 and L2, subset restriction on rank-1 i2 indices can be differently applied. The codebook subset restriction on rank-1 i2 indices is illustrated in terms of parameters L1 and L2, with an assumption that the master codebook has rank-1 i2 indices corresponding to beam grid 1210: (L1, L2) = (4,4).
In this case, the master codebook for i2 comprises 16 beams, spanned by 4x4 beams in the first and the second dimension s. In some embodiments, the index h and v in the figure corresponds to i2,1 and i2,2. The shaded squares represent the rank-1 i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included. In the figure, 1210, 1220, 1230, 1240, 1250 and 1260 respectively correspond to a codebook subset when (L1,L2) = (4,4), (2,4), (4,2), (1,4), (4,1) and (2,2) are configured. For example, 1050 shows that the beam group selected after the codebook subset restriction comprises four beams in the h dimension: (v = i2,2 = 0 and h = i2,1 = 0, 1, 2, 3).
In one method, for each dimension, a UE is configured with beam skipping (i.e., sd), as illustrated in TABLE 22. Beam skipping (i.e., sd) is a parameter indicating an interval between two groups which are adjacent each other. More specifically, the interval is an interval between leading beam of first beam group and leading beam of second beam group which is adjacent to the first beam group. The two groups comprise the first beam group and the second beam group.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000202
In one method, for each dimension, a UE is configured with beam spacing (i.e., pd), as illustrated in TABLE 23.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000203
In one method, for both dimensions, a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)), so that the UE can restrict the beam groups as illustrated in FIGURE 39. In one example, the UE is configured with a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)) in the higher-layer according to TABLE 24.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000204
The motivation for these methods is to support various antenna configurations at the eNB with minimal signaling overhead. This configuration may be applied based on the codebook subset restriction in the form of a bit sequence. The bit sequence may consist of at least two bitmaps, one for i1,H and i1,V and the other for i2.
Modification of the Legacy 8-Tx and 4-Tx Codebooks to Construct FD-MIMO Master Codebook and CSR (Codebook Subset Restriction)
In some embodiments, the antenna ports are numbered according to FIGURES 5A to 5D, in which it is assumed that the first dimension for the PMI corresponds to a longer dimension of the array and the second dimension corresponds to a shorter dimension of the array. When Q = 16, the oversampled DFT vectors for the first dimension, un , are of length 4, and the oversampled DFT vectors for the second dimension, vm , are of length 2. When Q = 12, the DFT vectors for the first dimension are of length 3, and the DFT vectors for the second dimension are of length 2. In other words, the number of polarization for each case is two.
Codebook W is constructed based on W1 and W2. W1 may be constructed according to beam skipping number (sd) and W2 may be constructed according to beam spacing number (pd).
In such a case, with config A in FIGURE 5A to 5D, the first dimension is for the horizontal dimension and the second dimension is for the vertical dimension. The beam spacing p1 for the first dimension is selected such that a narrowly spaced beams in the first dimension comprise a beam group, and the beam spacing p2 for the second dimension is selected such that a widely spaced beams in the second dimension comprise the beam group. For example, for this operation, p1 and p2 can be chosen as: p1 = 1, p2 = 8. In addition, the total number of beams for the first and the second dimension are made the same: by selecting M' = 32 and N' = 32 for the two oversampled DFT vectors vm and un. This way, the first dimension comprising 4-Tx ULA (Uniform Linear Array) has closely spaced beams, and the second dimension comprising 2-Tx ULA has widely spaced beams, relatively.
When the legacy parameters of s1 = 2 and s2 = 1 are chosen, the number of bits for the first PMI ( i1,1 and i1,2 ) can be correspondingly determined. The range of i1,1=0,1,...,15 and hence 4 bits are necessary to quantize the information when no codebook subset restriction is applied to this PMI. The range of i1,2 can be chosen to be i1,2=0,1,...,31 , and hence 5 bits are necessary to quantize the information when no codebook subset restriction is applied to this PMI.
In order to reduce the master codebook size, new parameters can be chosen. For example, s1 = 2 and s2 = 2 are used, the range of both i1,1 and i1,2 are 0 - 15, and hence 4 bits are necessary to quantize each information when no codebook subset restriction is applied to this PMI.
The configuration of (p1 = 1, p2 = 8) configures W1 beam group comprising closely spaced beams for the first dimension, and widely spaced beams for the second dimension. This configuration is likely to be useful for configuration B (tall array), especially when the column spacing is large, e.g., 4λ or even 10λ. In configuration B, the first dimension corresponds to azimuth, and the second dimension corresponds to elevation. Because the beam angle variation over time and frequency is wide in the azimuth domain and the TXRU HPBW (Half Power Beam Width) in the azimuth domain is also wide (60 degrees), and hence it is likely that widely spaced azimuth beams will provide performance gain.
The configuration of (p1 = 1, p2 = 1) that configures W1 beam group comprising closely spaced beams for the both dimensions is useful for configuration A (wide array). Because the TXRU elevation beam width is narrow, so the beam groups with narrowly spaced beams are likely to provide performance gain.
Hence, in these embodiments, a UE may get configured with (p1 = 1, p2 = 1) if the serving eNB has wide array, and (p1 = 1, p2 = 8) if the serving eNB has tall array in the higher layer (i.e., RRC), as illustrated in TABLE 25.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000205
In one method, the information element in TABLE 25 is defined in terms of (M, N, P) in FIGURE 9, the first value corresponding to a wide array may correspond to a configuration with N > M, and the second value corresponding to a tall array may correspond to a configuration with N < M. For example, when Q = 16, (M,N) = (2,4) corresponds to the first value; and (4,2) corresponds to the second value.
Codebook Subset Restriction Bitmap Construction For W1
In some embodiments, the beam skipping sd is used for determining the bitmap {,n=0,...,31} for codebook subset restriction on rank-1 i1,H and i1,V: If
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000207
=1, UE is configured to be able to select i1,d = n for the PMI reporting; and If
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000208
=0, UE is configured such that the PMI and RI reporting is not allowed to correspond to precoder(s) associated with i1,d = n.
In these embodiments it is assumed that (i1,1 , i1,2) = (i1,H , i1,V), but the same design can apply even if (i1,1 , i1,2) = (i1,V , i1,H).
In one method, the UE is configured in the higher layer (RRC), which beam skipping the UE has to use to construct for each of i1,d. In one such example, the UE can be configured with either sd = 2 or sd = 4 for each of i1,d. Accordingly, the CSR bitmap can be constructed as in TABLE 26. It is noted that similar CSR bitmap tables can be straightforwardly constructed if other values such as 1 or 8 are also allowed to be configured for sd.
In some embodiment, the number of bits to be reported for i1,d changes dependent upon the configured value of sd. In one example, when sd = 2, 4 bit information is reported for i1,d; on the other hand when sd = 4, 3 bit information is reported for i1,d. With reducing number of bits to feedback, the CSI decoding reliability at the eNB can be improved.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000209
Codebook Subset Restriction Bitmap Construction For W2
In some embodiments, the beam spacing pd is used for determining the bitmap {
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000210
,n=0,1,...,7} to indicate indices in a W2 beam group for rank-1 i2: if
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000211
= 1, UE is configured to be able to select sdi1,d + n for the PMI reporting; and if
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000212
= 0, UE is configured such that the PMI and RI reporting is not allowed to correspond to precoder(s) associated with sdi1,d + n.
In one method, the UE is configured in the higher layer (RRC), which beam spacing the UE has to use to construct for i2 (or each of i2,1 and i2,2). In one such example, the UE can be configured with either pd = 1 or pd = 2 for each of i1,d. Accordingly, the CSR bitmap can be constructed as in TABLE 27. It is noted that similar CSR bitmap tables can be straightforwardly constructed if other values are also allowed to be configured for pd.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000213
For W2, i.e., for beam selection within the selected beam group and co-phase selection, four alternatives (Alt 1 through Alt 4) are considered for codebook subset restriction bitmap construction.
In some embodiments (Alt 1), the number of beams in the first dimension (L1), the number of beams in the second dimension (L2), and the co-phase (
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000214
) are used for determining a bitmap { cn,n=0,1,2,...,63 } for codebook subset restriction on rank-1 i2 (as in TABLE 18): If cn = 1, UE is configured to be able to select i2 = n for the PMI reporting; and if cn = 0, UE is configured such that the PMI and RI reporting is not allowed to correspond to precoder(s) associated with i2 = n.
When either TABLE 17 or TABLE 18 is configured as a master codebook, the CSR bitmap is can be constructed as in TABLE 28. The CSR (L1,L2) = (1,4), (4,1) and (2,2) are respectively corresponding to beam grids 1240, 1250 and 1260 in FIGURE 30.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000215
When the UE reports i2,1, i2,2 and n in place of i2, the values that can be reported by the UE for i2,1 and i2,2 are configured to be restricted according to the table for 1240, 1250 and 1260.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000216
Observing TABLE 28, we realize that with only these three choices for (L1, L2), the total number of i2’s used with the subset restriction is only 32. This implies that some codewords in TABLE 17 and TABLE 18 can never be selected. Hence, we alternatively propose to reduce the size of master codebook and define the codebook subset restriction in terms of (L1, L2) accordingly.
In these embodiments, master codebooks are alternatively defined as in TABLE 29 and TABLE 30, with fewer elements (32) than its counterparts (64) in TABLE 17 and TABLE 18. TABLE 29 and TABLE 30 may correspond to TABLE 17 and TABLE 18, respectively. In this case, the codebook subset restriction can be constructed as in TABLE 31 for 1240, 1250 and 1260.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000217
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000218
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000219
In some embodiments (Alt 2), the number of beams in the first dimension (L1), the number of beams in the second dimension (L2), and the co-phase (
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000220
) are used for determining the bitmap { cn, n=0,1,2,...,15 } for codebook subset restriction on rank-1 i2, where the bitmap {cn} is a joint bitmap for (L1, L2): if cn = 1, UE is configured to be able to select i2 = 4n+m, for all m=0,1,2,3 such that dm = 1, for the PMI reporting; and if cn = 0, UE is configured such that the PMI and RI reporting is not allowed to correspond to precoder(s) associated with i2 = 4n+m, for all m=0,1,2,3.
Note that there is no subset restriction (or bitmap) for the co-phase
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000221
. The UE may assume all four co-phase values {1,j,-1,-j} to derive rank-1 i2.
An example of the bitmap is shown below in TABLE 32.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000222
In some embodiments (Alt 3), the number of beams in the first dimension (L1), the number of beams in the second dimension (L2), and the co-phase (
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000223
) are used for determining the separate bitmaps {cn, n=0,1,2,...,15 } and { dm, m=0,1,2,3 } for codebook subset restriction on rank-1 i2, where the bitmap {cn} is a joint bitmap for (L1,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000224
) and the bitmap {dm} is for L2:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000225
An example of the bitmap is shown below in TABLE 33.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000226
Note that the case in which UE is configured with a joint bitmap for (L2,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000227
) and a bitmap for L1 can be similarly constructed.
In some embodiments (Alt 4), the number of beams in the first dimension (L1), the number of beams in the second dimension (L2), and the co-phase (
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000228
) are used for determining the separate bitmaps {cn, n=0,1,2,3 } and { dm, m=0,1,2,3 }, and { ek, k=0,1,2,3 } for codebook subset restriction on rank-1 i2, where the bitmap {cn} is for L1, the bitmap {dm} is for L2, and the bitmap {ek} is for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000229
:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000230
An example of the bitmap is shown below in TABLE 34.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000231
In some embodiments, the UE is further configured to restrict to report PMI, RI and PTI within a precoder codebook subset specified by:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000232
For a UE configured in transmission mode X, the bitmap is configured for each CSI process and each subframe sets (if subframe sets CCSI,0 and CCSI,1 are configured by higher layers) by higher layer signaling. For a specific precoder codebook and associated transmission mode, the bitmap can specify all possible precoder codebook subsets from which the UE can assume the eNB may be using when the UE is configured in the relevant transmission mode X.
The composite bitmap
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000233
or
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000234
forms the bit sequence
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000235
,...,a3,a2,a1,a0 where a0 is the LSB and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000236
is the MSB and where a bit value of zero indicates that the PMI and RI reporting is not allowed to correspond to precoder(s) associated with the bit.
The association of bits to precoders for the transmission mode X for N1 = 8, N2 = 4, o1 = 8 and o2 = 8 is given as follows:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000237
Four alternatives can be considered for the indexing of bits for W2 (for beam selection and co-phasing) codebook subset restriction:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000238
FIGURE 31 illustrates a flowchart 3100 for UE operation for configuring parameterized codebook according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 31 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In step S3103, the UE determines whether to be configured with at least one of beam skipping or beam grouping for a codebook. If the UE determines whether to be configured with the beam skipping or the beam grouping for the codebook, the UE performs next operation in step S3105. On the other hand, if the UE does not determine whether to be configured with the beam skipping or the beam grouping for the codebook, the UE performs next operation in step S3110.
In step S3105, if the UE is configured with at least one of beam skipping or beam grouping, according to some embodiments on this disclosure, the proposed codebook subset restriction according to some embodiments of this disclosure may be used.
In step S3110, if the UE is not configured with at least one of beam skipping or beam grouping, the legacy codebook subset restriction may be used.
FIGURE 32 illustrates a flowchart 3200 of the overall eNB and UE operation according to the parameterized codebook according to the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 32 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Referring to FIGURE 32, in step S3205, eNB determines at least one of beam skipping or beam grouping parameters. The eNB determines at least one of beam skipping or beam grouping parameters for configuring parameterized codebook and PMI, RI, CQI calculation with the eNB.
In step S3210, the eNB determines bit sequence associated with a codebook. The determined bit sequence is communicated to the UE via higher layer signaling such as RRC.
The bit sequence may be indicate parameters associated with the codebook. In some embodiments, the parameters comprise the number of antennas for a first dimension, the number of antennas for a second dimension, an oversampling rate associated with the first dimension, an oversampling rate associated with the second dimension, and a parameter instructing a codebook configuration.
In other embodiments, the parameters comprise a parameter associated with subset restriction for a first codebook or a parameter associated with subset restriction for a second codebook. The codebook is determined based on the first codebook and the second codebook. The parameter associated with subset restriction for the first codebook or the parameter associated with subset restriction for the second codebook may be
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000239
shown in FIGURE 26, or cn, dm, and ek presented in Alt 1, 2, 3 or 4.
In step S3215, the UE receives the bit sequence for the configured codebook.
In step S3220, the UE derives the codebook corresponding to the bit sequence. The codebook is constructed by using DFT matrix or Walsh matrix as precoder matrix. Also, the codebook is constructed in various forms by being combined with phase shift matrix or phase shift diversity matrix. The RI indicates information associated with a rank for channel, and means the number of streams which is received by the UE through a resource. The PMI is a value reflected spatial characteristic, and indicates an index of a precoder which the UE prefers to. The CQI is a value indicating signal strength, may indicate Signal-to-Interference plus Noise Ratio (SINR) of received signals. The UE determines PMI, RI, and CQI for performing feedback.
In step 3225, the UE derives PMI, RI, and CQI. The UE determines the codebook based on the PMI, RI and CQI.
In step S3230, the eNB receives the PMI, RI, and CQI from the UE. In other words, the UE performs feedback for the PMI, RI, and CQI. A precoder between the eNB and the UE may be shared in this way.
In some embodiments, UE is configured with another codebook parameter bd where d = 1,2 for the beam group type in the first stage codebook (W1). For example: if bd = 0, the beam groups consist of closely spaced or adjacent beams in dimension d; and if bd = 1, the beam groups consist of widely spaced or orthogonal beam pairs in dimension d.
FIGURE 33 illustrates an example beam group type 3300 in which beams are adjacent in both dimensions according to the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 33 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
For example, beam groups are adjacent in both dimensions, i.e., b1= b2= 0. The beam groups 0, 1, 2,…, 31 represent beam groups with 2 adjacent beams in horizontal and 2 adjacent beams in vertical dimensions. For example, beam group 0 consists of beams {0,1} in horizontal and beams {0,1} in vertical. In other examples, beam group 31 consists of beams {14, 15} in horizontal and beams {7, 8} in vertical. Numbering scheme shown in FIGURE 33 is an example only, does not limit various embodiments.
FIGURES 34A and 34B illustrate another example beam group types 3402, 3404 in which a beam group consists of orthogonal beam pairs in the first (horizontal) dimension, i.e., b1 = 1, and adjacent beams in the second (vertical) dimension, i.e., b2 = 1. The embodiments shown in FIGURES 34A and 34B are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Two alternatives for the orthogonal beams can be considered: Alt 1 3402 as illustrated for the farthest orthogonal beams and Alt 2 3404 for the closest orthogonal beams.
Referring to FIGURE 34A, In Alt 1 3402, the beam groups 0, 1, 2,…, 15 represent beam groups with 2 orthogonal beam pairs in horizontal and 2 adjacent beams in vertical dimensions. For example, beam group 0 consists of beams {0,1,8,9} in horizontal and beams {0,1} in vertical. Note that two orthogonal beam pairs are shown as two separated groups.
In some embodiments, UE is configured with the parameterized KP codebook in which at least one of the codebook parameters (Nd, od, sd, pd, Ld, bd), according to some embodiments of this disclosure, is specific to the number of transmission layers (or rank).
In one method, rank 1 and rank 2 codebooks are such that the beam groups consist of closely spaced or adjacent beams in both horizontal and vertical dimensions for both rank 1 and rank 2 codebooks (b1 = 0, b2 = 0 for both rank 1 and rank 2). In this method, a first set of codebook parameters may be the same for both codebooks, and a second set of parameters may be different. The first set of common parameters for rank 1 and 2 codebooks may be (Nd, od, Ld, bd) and the second set of different parameters may be (sd, pd). For instance, sd and pd can be both 1 and 2 for rank 1 codebook, but they are 2 for rank 2 codebook. An example of the two sets is shown below.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000240
In another method, rank 1 and rank 2 codebooks are such that the beam groups consist of adjacent beams in both horizontal and vertical dimensions for rank 1 codebook (b1 = 0 and b2 = 0 for rank 1), and both adjacent and orthogonal beams in horizontal dimension and only adjacent beams in vertical dimension for rank 2 codebooks (b1 = 0,1 and b2 = 0,1 for rank 2). In this method, a first set of codebook parameters may be the same for both codebooks, and a second set of parameters may be different. The first set of common parameters for rank 1 and 2 codebooks may be (Nd, od, Ld,b2) and the second set of different parameters may be (b1, sd, pd). For instance, sd and pd can be both 1 and 2 for rank 1 codebook, but they are 2 for rank 2 codebook. An example of the two sets is shown below.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000241
In some embodiments, parameters related to both first stage and second stage codebooks are rank-specific. For example, both s1 and s2 (W1 parameters), and p1 and p2 (W2 parameters) may be rank-specific.
In some embodiments, parameters related to one of the first and second stage codebooks are rank-specific. For example, s1 and s2 (first stage or W1 codebook) are the common, and p1 and p2 (second stage or W2 codebook) are rank-specific.
Codebook Design for Rank 1
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000242
In some embodiments, TABLE 35 is used as a rank-1 (1 layer) master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein the corresponding rank 1 precoder is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000243
. Note that in this table, the numbering scheme 2 in is assumed. The table for numbering scheme 1 can be constructed similarly. In this table, the 1st dimension beam index m1 increases first as i2 increases. In an alternate table, the 2nd dimension beam index m2 may increase first as i2 increases.
In some embodiments, Q is equal to 2N1*N2.
In some embodiments, the UE reports i2,1, i2,2 and n in place of i2, in which case m1 and m2 are determined as:
m1=s1i1,1 + p1i2,1 and m2=s2i1,2 + p2i2,2.
In those embodiments related to T6, and other related embodiments, the parameters s1, s2, p1, and p2 in this table can be selected, e.g., according to T3, and it is assumed that (L1 , L2) = (4, 2). Also i1,1=0,1,...,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000244
-1 and i1,2=0,1,...,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000245
-1.
The number of rank-1 i2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 6 is 32, so 5 bits are needed to report i2 based on this master codebook.
The master codebook for other parameters and for more than 1 layer can be similarly constructed.
Unified Codebook For Beamformed And Non-Precoded CSI-RS
In some embodiments,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000246
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000247
to comprise a precoder
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000248
, are differently configured depending on whether beamformed CSI-RS, or non-precoded CSI-RS or both are configured.
In one such example with Q = 16 and N1 = 4 and N2 = 2:
When the UE is configured with only non-precoded CSI-RS or both types of CSI-RS, the UE is further configured to use:
Either (Numbering scheme 2)
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000249
and ; or
(Numbering scheme 1)
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000251
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000252
; and
When the UE is configured with only beamformed CSI-RS, the UE is further configured to use:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000253
wherein
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000254
, m = 0, 1, …, N-1, is an Nx1 column vector comprising with (N-1) elements with zero value and one element with value of one. The one element with value of one is on (m+1)-th row. For example,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000255
=[0 1 0 0]t; and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000256
=[0 0 1 0]t. In this case, the UE is further configured to use i1,1 = i1,2 = 0 in the table entries, and the UE is configured to report only i2 as PMI, and not to report i1,1 and i1,2.
The precoding vector obtained with numbering scheme 2 can be applied on the antenna ports. In these embodiments, the first dimension corresponds to a longer dimension of the array; and the second dimension corresponds to a shorter dimension of the array. On the contrary, the precoding vector obtained with numbering scheme 1 can be applied on the antenna ports numbered in such a way that the first dimension corresponds to a shorter dimension of the array; and the second dimension corresponds to a longer dimension of the array.
In some embodiments, the UE can identify that a configured CSI-RS resource is beamformed or non-precoded by:
Alt 1. Explicit RRC indication: The UE is configured with a higher-layer parameter for the configured CSI-RS resource, indicating whether the configured CSI-RS resource is beamformed or non-precoded; and
Alt 2. Implicit indication: The UE is configured with a different set of CSI-RS port numbers for beamformed CSI-RS than the non-precoded CSI-RS. In one example, the beamformed CSI-RS takes antenna port numbers 200-207, while the non-precoded CSI-RS takes antenna port numbers 15-30.
Rank-1 Beam Grouping
FIGURE 35 illustrates alternative rank-1 beam grouping schemes 3500 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiments shown in FIGURE 35 are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In the embodiments, depending on the values of parameters L1 and L2, subset restriction on rank-1 i2 indices can be differently applied.
A beam grouping scheme can be configured by means of codebook subset selection (or codebook subsampling) on rank-1 i2 indices e.g., in terms of parameters L1 and L2, with an assumption that the master codebook has rank-1 i2 indices corresponding to 810: (L1, L2) = (4,2). In this case, the master codebook for i2 comprises 8 beams, spanned by 4x2 beams in the first and the second dimensions.
In some embodiments, the 1st dim and the 2nd dim in the figure correspond to i2,1 and i2,2. The shaded (black) squares represent the rank-1 i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
In the FIGURE 35, 820 corresponds to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (4,1) is configured and the selected beam group comprises of 4 beams located at{(0,0), (1,0), (2,0), (3,0)}.
beam grouping schemes 830a - 830f correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (2,2) is configured and different beam grouping schemes for the 4 selected beams are applied. For instance:
in beam grouping scheme 830a, the 4 beams are located at {(0,0), (0,1), (1,0), (1,1)};
in beam grouping scheme 830b, the 4 beams are located at {(0,0), (0,2), (1,0), (1,2)};
in beam grouping scheme 830c, the 4 beams are located at {(0,0), (0,3), (1,0), (1,3)};
in beam grouping scheme 830d, the 4 beams are located at {(0,0), (0,2), (1,1), (1,3)};
in beam grouping scheme 830e, the 4 beams are located at {(0,0), (0,1), (1,2), (1,3)}; and
in beam grouping scheme 830f, the 4 beams are located at {(0,0), (0,3), (1,1), (1,2)}.
Subset beam grouping schemes 840a - 840d correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (1,2) is configured and different beam grouping schemes for the 2 selected beams are applied. For instance:
in beam grouping scheme 840a, the 2 beams are located at {(0,0), (0,1)};
In beam grouping scheme 840b, the 2 beams are located at {(0,0), (1,1)};
In beam grouping scheme 840c, the 2 beams are located at {(0,0), (2,1)}; and
In beam grouping scheme 840d, the 2 beams are located at {(0,0), (3,1)}.
Subset beam grouping schemes 850a - 850c correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (2,1) is configured and different beam grouping schemes for the 2 selected beams are applied. For instance:
In beam grouping scheme 850a, the 2 beams are located at {(0,0), (1,0)};
In beam grouping scheme 850b, the 2 beams are located at {(0,0), (2,0)}; and
In beam grouping scheme 850c, the 2 beams are located at {(0,0), (3,0)}.
Beam grouping scheme 860 corresponds to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1,L2) = (1,1) is configured and the selected beam is located at (0,0).
The number of rank-1 i2 indices with the subset restriction depends on the beam grouping schemes. For the beam grouping schemes 820 - 830, it is 16 (4 × 4, 4 for the beams and 4 for the co-phase), so 4 bits are needed to report i2, for the configured beam grouping scheme from 820 - 830. For the beam grouping schemes 840 - 850, it is 8 (2 × 4, 2 for the beams and 4 for the co-phase), so 3 bits are needed to report i2, for the configured beam grouping scheme from 840 - 850. For the beam grouping scheme 860, it is 4 (1 × 4, 1 for the beam and 4 for the co-phase), so 2 bits are needed to report i2, for the configured beam grouping scheme 860.
In one method, for both dimensions, a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)), so that the UE can restrict the beam groups as illustrated in FIGURE 35. In one example, the UE is configured a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)) in the higher-layer according to TABLE 36. For each of (L1, L2) = (2,2), (1,2), and (2,1), there are multiple beam grouping schemes as shown in FIUGRE 35. In one option, one beam grouping scheme out of multiple beam grouping schemes 830 - 850 is explicitly configured. In another option, it is fixed to default schemes 830a, 840a, and 850a, for example.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000257
In another method, a UE can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 820 - 860 in FIGURE 35. For example, the subset of beam grouping schemes is {820, 830a, 830d, 860} in FIGURE 35, and the UE is configured with one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
In another method, a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 820 - 860 in FIGURE 35. For example, the subset of beam grouping schemes is {820, 830a, 830d, 860} in FIGURE 35, and the UE reports one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
The motivation for these methods is to support various antenna configurations at the eNB with minimal signaling overhead. This configuration may be applied based on the codebook subset selection in the form of a bit sequence. The bit sequence may consist of at least two bitmaps, one for i1,H and i1,V and the other for i2. The details of the bitmap are provided later in the disclosure.
Codebook Design for Rank 2
In the legacy rank-2 codebook design, dual-pol propagation and azimuth angle spread have been taken into account. In the Rel12 8-Tx rank-2 codebook, rank-2 precoder codebook comprises two types of rank-2 precoding matrices:
Type 1. Same-beam: the two beams for the two layers are the same; and
Type 2. Different-beam: the two beams for the two layers are different.
For each selected beam pair for the two layers, two precoders can be constructed with applying two co-phase matrices of
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000258
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000259
.
Relying on the Kronecker structure, a rank-2 master codebook can be constructed with these two types of rank-2 precoding matrices. For the 2D antenna configurations, the type 2 precoding matrices are further classified into:
Type 2-1. Different-beam in horizontal only: the two beams for the two layers are different for the horizontal component;
Type 2-2. Different-beam in vertical only: the two beams for the two layers are different for the vertical component; and
Type 2-3. Different-beam in both horizontal & vertical: the two beams for the two layers are different for both horizontal and vertical components.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000260
In some embodiments, TABLE 38 is used as a rank-2 (2 layer) master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein the corresponding rank 2 precoder is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000261
. As described below, Q represents the number of CSI-RS ports.
In other embodiments,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000262
may be expressed as
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000263
. In other words,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000264
may be expressed in an equation:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000265
. Five variables consist of two parameters associated with the first dimension, two parameters associated with the second dimension, and one parameter associated with a phase.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000266
can be expressed in an equation:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000267
not using Kronecker Product.
Note that in this table, the numbering scheme 2 in FIGURE 5 is assumed. The table for numbering scheme 1 can be constructed similarly. In this table, the 1st dimension beam index m1 increases first as i2 increases. In an alternate table, the 2nd dimension beam index m2 may increase first as i2 increases. Note that the master rank-2 codebook table is constructed based on the legacy (Rel12) rank 2 beam pairs (T8) for the longer dimension (L1 = 4) for each of the beams in the shorter dimension (L2 = 2).
In those embodiments related to TABLE 38, and other related embodiments, the parameters s1, s2, p1, and p2 in this table can be selected, e.g., according to T3 and it is assumed that (L1 , L2) = (4, 2). Also i1,1=0,1,...
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000268
and i1,2=0,1,...
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000269
.
The number of rank-2 i2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 38 is 32, so 5 bits are needed to report i2 based on this master codebook.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000270
In some embodiments,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000271
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000272
to comprise a rank-2 precoder
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000273
, are differently configured depending on whether beamformed CSI-RS, or non-precoded CSI-RS or both are configured. When the UE is configured with only non-precoded CSI-RS or both types of CSI-RS, then
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000274
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000275
are DFT vectors of appropriate lengths (depending on numbering scheme 1 or 2) as in rank-1 codebook case, and when the UE is configured with only beamformed CSI-RS, then they are unit vectors of appropriate lengths.
FIGURE 36 illustrate a beam combination 3600 to construct rank-2 master codebook based on TABLE 37 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 36 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Utilizing the 8 beam pairs in TABLE 37 for the longer dimension (L1 = 4) and for each beam in the shorter dimension (L2 = 2), an 8x2 grid can be considered for the two dimensions as shown in FIGURE 36. When beam pair indices (x, y) is selected for the 1st and 2nd dimensions, corresponding beam pairs are selected for the longer dimension, according to TABLE 37. For the shorter dimension, the beam index corresponds to the index y.
For example, applying TABLE 37 to x, with x = 1 the selected beam pair for the first dimension is (1,1) and with y = 1, the selected beam for the second dimension is 1. Then, the corresponding rank-2 precoding matrix is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000276
, where m1 = m1' = s1 ·i1,1+ p1, and m2 = m2' = s2 ·i1,2+ p2.
In general, when the selected beam pair for the first dimension is (a0,a1) and the selected beam for the second dimension is b0, the beam indices m1, m1', m2, m2' are selected as:
m1 = s1 ·i1,1+ a0·p1;
m1' = s1 ·i1,1+ a1·p1; and
m2 = m2' = s2 ·i1,2+ b0·p2.
As total number of pairs for (x,y) in FIGURE 36 is 16, with applying the two co-phases of {1,j} for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000277
, the total number of codewords becomes 32 (2 X 16).
Embodiments on Rank-2 Beam Groupings
FIGURE 37 illustrates rank-2 beam grouping schemes for rank-2 i2 3700 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 37 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Depending on the values of parameters L1 and L2, subset restriction on rank-2 i2 indices can be differently applied. In the embodiments, a beam grouping scheme is configured by means of codebook subset selection or codebook subsampling on rank-2 i2 indices e.g., in terms of parameters L1 and L2, with an assumption that the master codebook has rank-2 i2 indices corresponding to 1010: (L1, L2) = (4,2). In this case, the master codebook for i2 comprises 16 rank-2 beam combinations, as shown in FIGURE 36 also, which are shown as a 8x2 beam combination grid where 8 corresponds to the number of legacy rank-2 beam pairs for the first dimension (L1 = 4, see TABLE 37) and 2 corresponds to the 2 beams for the second dimension (L2 = 2).
In some embodiments, the 1st dim and the 2nd dim in the figure correspond to i2,1 and i2,2. The shaded (black) squares represent the rank-2 i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
In the FIGURE 37, beam grouping scheme 1020 corresponds to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (4,2) is configured and the selected beam combination comprises of 4 combinations located at{(x,y)} where x = {0,1,2,3} and y = {0,1}. Note that this corresponds to the case in which the subset restriction is such that in the first dimension, only same beams are allowed to be used for both layers.
Beam grouping scheme 1030 corresponds to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (4,1) is configured and the selected beam combination comprises of 8 combinations located at{(x,0)} where x is according to TABLE 37; and beam grouping schemes 1040a - 1040f correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (2,2) is configured and six different beam combinations are applied. For instance:
in beam grouping scheme 1040a, the 8 beam combinations are {(x,y)} where x = {0,1,4,5}and y = {0,1};
in beam grouping scheme 1040b, the 8 beam combinations are {(x,y)} where x = {0,2,4,6}and y = {0,1};
in beam grouping scheme 1040c, the 8 beam combinations are {(x,y)} where x = {0,3,4,7}and y = {0,1};
in beam grouping scheme 1040d, the 8 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,1,4,5}and {(x,1)} where x = {2,3,6,7};
in beam grouping scheme 1040e, the 8 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,3,4,7}and {(x,1)} where x = {1,2,5,6}; and
in beam grouping scheme 1040f, the 8 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,2,4,6}and {(x,1)} where x = {1,3,5,7}.
Beam grouping schemes 1050a - 1050d correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (1,2) is configured and four different beam combinations are applied. For instance:
in beam grouping scheme 1050a, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,4}and {(x,1)} where x = {0,4};
in beam grouping scheme 1050b, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,4}and {(x,1)} where x = {1,5};
in beam grouping scheme 1050c, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,4}and {(x,1)} where x = {2,6}; and
in beam grouping scheme 1050d, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,4}and {(x,1)} where x = {3,7};
Beam grouping schemes 1060a - 1060c correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (2,1) is configured and four different beam combinations are applied. For instance:
in beam grouping scheme 1060a, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,1,4,5};
in beam grouping scheme 1060b, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,2,4,6}; and
in beam grouping scheme 1060c, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,3,4,7}.
Beam grouping scheme 1070 corresponds to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (1,1) is configured and the one beam is located at (0,0).
The number of rank-2 i2 indices with the subset restriction depends on the beam grouping schemes. For the beam grouping schemes 1020 - 1040, it is 16 (8 × 2, 8 for the beam combinations and 2 for the co-phase), so 4 bits are needed to report i2, for the configured beam grouping scheme from 1020 - 1040. For the beam grouping schemes 1050 - 1060, it is 8 (4 × 2, 4 for the beam combinations and 2 for the co-phase), so 3 bits are needed to report i2, for the configured beam grouping scheme from 1050 - 1060. For the beam grouping scheme 1070, it is 2 (1 × 2, 1 for the beam and 2 for the co-phase), so 1 bit is needed to report i2, for the configured beam grouping scheme 1070.
In one method, for both dimensions, a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)), so that the UE can restrict the rank-2 beam combinations as illustrated in FIGURE 37. In one example, the UE is configured a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)) in the higher-layer according to TABLE 39. For (L1, L2) = (2,2), (1,2), and (2,1), there are multiple beam grouping schemes. In one option, one beam grouping scheme out of multiple beam grouping schemes is explicitly configured. In another option, it is fixed to default beam grouping schemes 1040a, 1050a, and 1060a, for example.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000278
In another method, a UE can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 1020 - 1070 in FIGURE 37. For example, the subset of beam grouping schemes is {1020, 1030, 1040a, 1070} in FIGURE 37, and the UE is configured with one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
In another method, a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 1020 - 1070 in FIGURE 37. For example, the subset of beam grouping schemes is {1020, 1030, 1040a, 1070} in FIGURE 37, and the UE reports one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
As in rank-1 and rank-2 codebook cases, for the description of rank 3-8 codebooks, numbering scheme 2 is assumed; the method can be straightforwardly modified if numbering scheme 1 is assumed, with placing different u beams on the MIMO layers instead of different v beams in the Kronecker products.
Codebook Design for Rank 3 and Rank 4
In the Rel-12 8-Tx rank-3 codebook, rank-3 precoder codebook comprises beam groups with four pairs of orthogonal beams: (0,8), (2,10), (4,12), and (6,14). One orthogonal beam pair (b0,b1) is selected for the three layers and three precoders can be constructed with applying the co-phase matrix of
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000279
on the tuple (b0,b0,b1) and (b1,b0,b1), and the co-phase matrix of
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000280
on the tuple (b0,b1,b1) and (b0,b1,b0).
In some embodiments, TABLE 40 is used as a rank-3 (3 layer) master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein the corresponding rank 3 precoder is either
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000281
or
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000282
.
Note that the master rank-3 codebook table is constructed based on the legacy (Rel12 8-Tx) rank-3 orthogonal beam pairs for the longer dimension (L1 = 4) for each of the beams in the shorter dimension (L1 = 2).
The number of rank-2 i2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 40 is 32, so 5 bits are needed to report i2 based on this master codebook.
In one method, the codebook parameters in the first dimension are legacy parameters, i.e., s1 = 8, p1 = 1, and i1,1 = 0 - 3. In another method, they are non-legacy parameters. The parameters for the second dimension, s2 and p2, in this table can be selected, e.g., according to TABLE 13, and it is assumed that (L1 , L2) = (4, 2). Also, i1,2=0,1,...,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000283
.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000284
In the Rel-10 8-Tx rank-4 codebook, rank-4 precoder codebook comprises beam groups with four pairs of orthogonal beams: (0,8), (2,10), (4,12), and (6,14). One orthogonal beam pair (b0,b1) is selected for the four layers and four precoders can be constructed with applying two co-phase matrices of
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000285
on the tuple (b0,b1, b0,b1).
In some embodiments, TABLE 41 is used as a rank-4 (4 layer) master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein the corresponding rank 4 precoder is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000286
.
Note that the master rank-4 codebook table is constructed based on the legacy (Rel12 8-Tx) rank-4 orthogonal beam pairs for the longer dimension (L1 = 4) for each of the beams in the shorter dimension (L1 = 2).
The number of rank-4 i2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 41 is 16, so 4 bits are needed to report i2 based on this master codebook.
In one method, the codebook parameters in the first dimension are legacy parameters, i.e., s1 = 8, p1 = 1, and i1,1 = 0 - 3. In another method, they are non-legacy parameters. The parameters for the second dimension, s2 and p2, in this table can be selected, e.g., according to TABLE 13, and it is assumed that (L1 , L2) = (4, 2). Also, i1,2=0,1,...
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000287
-1.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000288
Embodiments on Rank-3 and Rank-4 Beam Grouping
FIGURE 38 illustrates beam pairs 3800 to construct rank-3 and rank-4 master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 387 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Utilizing the legacy 4 (Rel12 8-Tx) orthogonal beam pairs for the longer dimension (L1 = 4) and for each beam in the shorter dimension (L2 = 2), an 8x2 grid can be considered for the two dimensions as shown (shaded and pattern squares) in FIGURE 38. There are four types of shaded and pattern squares corresponding to the four orthogonal beam pairs in the first dimension. In the rest of the disclosure, we indicate the four orthogonal beam pairs in a beam group by their leading beams {0,2,4,6}. When the beam combination indices (x, y) where x = {0,2,4,6} and y = {0,1} is selected for the 1st and 2nd dimensions, the orthogonal beam pair with the leading beam x is selected for the longer dimension and the beam index y is selected for the shorter dimension.
FIGURE 39 illustrates grouping schemes 3900 for rank-3 and rank-4 i2 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 39 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Depending on the values of parameters L1 and L2, subset restriction on rank-3 and rank-4 i2 indices can be differently applied. In some embodiments, a beam grouping scheme is configured by means of codebook subset selection or codebook subsampling on rank-3 and rank-4 i2 e.g., indices in terms of parameters L1 and L2, with an assumption that the master codebook has rank-3 and rank-4 i2 indices corresponding to 1210: (L1, L2) = (4,2). In this case, the master codebook for i2 comprises 16 rank-3 and 8 rank-4 beam combinations, which are constructed from the 8x2 (shaded and pattern squares) beam combination grid where 8 corresponds to the four orthogonal beam pairs for the first dimension (L1 = 4) and 2 corresponds to the 2 beams for the second dimension (L2 = 2).
In some embodiments, the 1st dim and the 2nd dim in the figure corresponds to i2,1 and i2,2. The shaded or pattern squares represent the rank-3 and rank-4 i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group. In the figure, only one half (i.e., leading beam indices {0,2,4,6} of the four orthogonal beam pairs) are shown. The second half is shaded or denoted by pattern in the same way of the first half.
As shown in FIGURE 39, element 1220 corresponds to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (4,1) is configured and the selected beam combination comprises of 4 beam combinations located at {(x,0)} where x = {0,2,4,6} is the leading beam indices of the four orthogonal beam pairs.
Beam grouping schemes 1230a - 1230f correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (2,2) is configured and six different beam combinations are applied. For instance: in beam grouping scheme 1230a, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,y)} where x = {0,2}and y = {0,1};
in beam grouping scheme 1230b, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,y)} where x = {0,4}and y = {0,1};
in beam grouping scheme 1230c, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,y)} where x = {0,6}and y = {0,1};
in beam grouping scheme 1230d, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,4}and {(x,1)} where x = {2,6};
in beam grouping scheme 1230e, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,6}and {(x,1)} where x = {2,4}; and
in 1230f, the 4 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,2}and {(x,1)} where x = {4,6}.
Beam grouping schemes 1240a - 1240d correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (1,2) is configured and four different beam combinations are applied. For instance: in beam grouping scheme 1240a, the 2 beam combinations {(0,0), (0,1)};
in beam grouping scheme 1240b, the 2 beam combinations are {(0,0), (2,1)};
in beam grouping scheme 1240c, the 2 beam combinations are {(0,0), (4,1)}; and
in beam grouping scheme 1240d, the 2 beam combinations are {(0,0), (6,1)}.
Beam grouping schemes 1250a - 1250c correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (2,1) is configured and three different beam combinations are applied. For instance,
in beam grouping scheme 1250a, the 2 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,2};
in beam grouping scheme 1250b, the 2 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,4}; and
in beam grouping scheme 1250c, the 2 beam combinations are {(x,0)} where x = {0,6}.
Beam grouping scheme 1260 corresponds to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (1,1) is configured and the one beam combination is located at (0,0).
The number of rank 3-4 i2 indices with the subset restriction depends on the beam grouping schemes. For the beam grouping schemes 1220 - 1230, it is 16 and 8, respectively for rank 3 and 4. So, 4 bits and 3 bits are needed to report i2 for each configured beam grouping scheme from 1220 - 1230 for rank-3 and rank-4, respectively. For the beam grouping schemes 1240 - 1250, it is 8 and 4, respectively for rank 3 and 4. So, 3 bits and 2 bits are needed to report i2 for each configured beam grouping scheme from 1240 - 1250 for rank-3 and rank-4, respectively. For the beam grouping scheme 1260, it is 2 and 1, respectively for rank 3 and 4. So, 1 bits and 0 bit are needed to report i2 for the configured beam grouping scheme 1260 for rank-3 and rank-4, respectively.
In one method, for both dimensions, a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)), so that the UE can restrict the rank-3 and rank-4 beam combinations as illustrated in FIGURE 39. In one example, the UE is configured a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)) in the higher-layer according to TABLE 42. For (L1, L2) = (2,2), (1,2), and (2,1), there are multiple grouping schemes. In one option, one beam grouping scheme out of multiple beam grouping schemes is explicitly configured. In another option, it is fixed to default beam grouping schemes 1230a, 1240a, and 1250a, for example.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000289
In another method, a UE can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 1220 - 1260 in FIGURE 39. For example, the subset of beam grouping schemes is {1220, 1230a, 1260} in FIGURE 39, and the UE is configured with one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
In another method, a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes 1220 - 1260 in FIGURE 39. For example, the subset of beam grouping schemes is {{1220, 1230a, 1260} in FIGURE 39, and the UE reports one beam grouping scheme out of this subset.
Codebook Design for Ranks 5 - 8
In the Rel-12 8-Tx rank-5 codebook, the precoder codebook comprises beam groups with an orthogonal beams (b0, b1, b2) = (0,8,16) for rank 5 and 6 and (b0, b1, b2,b3) = (0,8,16,24) for rank 7 and 8. The rank-5 and rank-6 precoders can be constructed with applying the co-phase matrix of
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000290
on the tuple (b0, b0, b1, b1, b2) and (b0, b0, b1, b1, b2, b2), respectively. The rank 7 and rank 8 pre-coders are similarly constructed by including the fourth orthogonal beam 24.
In some embodiments, TABLE 43 is used as a rank-r (r layer) where r = {5,6,7,8} master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein the corresponding rank-5 precoder is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000291
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000292
Note that the master rank 5 - 8 codebook tables are constructed based on the legacy (Rel12 8-Tx) rank 5 - 8 orthogonal beams for the longer dimension (L1 = 4) for each of the beams in the shorter dimension (L1 = 2). In one method, the codebook parameters in the first dimension are legacy parameters, i.e., s1 = 2, p1 = 1, and i1,1 = 0 - 3 for rank 5 - 7 and i1,1 = 0 for rank 8. In another method, they are non-legacy parameters. The parameters for the second dimension, s2 and p2, in this table can be selected, e.g., according to TABLE 13, and it is assumed that (L1 , L2) = (4, 2). Also, i1,2=0,1,...,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000293
.
The number of rank 5 - 8 i2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 43 is 2, so 1 bit is needed to report i2 based on this master codebook.
Ranks 5 - 8 Beam Grouping
FIGURE 40 illustrates beam pairs 4000 to construct rank 5 - 8 beam combination master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 40 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Utilizing the legacy 3 (4) orthogonal beams (0,8,16) ((0,8,16,24)) for rank 5-6 (rank 7-8) for the longer dimension (L1 = 4) and for each beam in the shorter dimension (L2 = 2), an 3x2 (4x2) grid can be considered for the two dimensions as shown (shaded squares) in FIGURE 40.
FIGURE 41 illustrates grouping schemes 4100 for rank 5-8 i2 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 41 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Depending on the values of parameters L1 and L2, subset restriction on rank 5-8 i2 indices can be applied. In the embodiments, a beam grouping scheme is configured by means of codebook subset selection or codebook subsampling on rank 5-8 i2 e.g., indices in terms of parameters L1 and L2, with an assumption that the master codebook has rank 5-8 i2 indices corresponding to 1410 (rank 5-6) and 1430 (rank 7-8): (L1, L2) = (4,2). The shaded (black) squares represent the rank 5-8 i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group. As shown,1420 and 1440 correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1,L2) = (4,1) is configured. Note that no i2 indication is needed whenever subset restriction is configured.
In some embodiments, the number of i2 indices (W2 codebook size) of the master codebook and the codebooks that are obtained according to the W2 beam grouping schemes (or after codebook subset selection (CSS)) according to some embodiments of this disclosure can be summarized as in TABLE 44. It can be observed that a reduction of 1 bit in W2 feedback can be achieved with the proposed W2 beam grouping scheme (or CSS) compared to the master codebook.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000294
Embodiments on Different Beams in one or both of the Longer and Shorter Dimensions
In some embodiments, TABLE 44 is used to construct the beam pairs in the shorter dimension (L2 = 2) for the rank-2 master codebook.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000295
Rank-2 Codebook
In some embodiments, TABLE 46 is used as a rank-2 (2 layer) master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein TABLE 37 and TABLE 45, respectively are used for the beam pairs in the longer and the shorter dimensions to construct the master rank-2 codebook. The i2 indices 0 - 31 are identical to those in TABLE 38 (i.e., rank-2 beam pair Type 1, and Type 2-1). In addition to those, i2 indices 32 - 47 are corresponding to rank-2 beam pair Type 2-2 and 2-3.
It is noted that the number of rank-2 i2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 46 is 48.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000296
FIGURE 42 illustrate a beam combination 4200 to construct a master codebook for rank-2 beam combinations according to TABLE 37 and TABLE 45 according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 42 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Utilizing the 8 beam pairs in TABLE 37 for the longer dimension (L1 = 4) and the 3 beam pairs in TABLE 45 for the shorter dimension (L2 = 2), an 8x3 grid can be considered for the two dimensions as shown in FIGURE 42. When beam pair indices (x, y) is selected for the 1st and 2nd dimensions, corresponding beam pairs are selected for the longer and the shorter dimension, according to TABLE 37 and TABLE 45, respectively.
For example, applying TABLE 37 to x and TABLE 45 to y, with x = 1 the selected beam pair for the first dimension is (1,1) and with y = 2, the selected beam pair for the second dimension is (0,1). Then, the corresponding rank-2 precoding matrix is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000297
, where: m1 = m1' = s1 ·i1,1+ p1; m2 = s2 ·i1,2; and m2' = s2 ·i1,2+ p2.
In general, when the selected beam pair for the first dimension is (a0,a1) and the selected beam pair for the second dimension is (b0, b1), the beam indices m1, m1', m2, m2' are selected as: m1 = s1 ·i1,1+ a0·p1; m1' = s1 ·i1,1+ a1·p1; m2 = s1 ·i1,2+ b0·p2; and m2' = s2 ·i1,2+ a1·p2.
As total number of pairs for (x,y) in FIGURE 42 is 24, with applying the two co-phases of {1,j} for
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000298
, total number of codewords becomes 48.
Rank-2 Beam Groupings
FIGURE 43 illustrates rank-2 beam grouping schemes 4300 according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 43 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Depending on the values of parameters L1 and L2, subset restriction on rank-2 i2 indices can be differently applied. In the embodiments, a beam grouping scheme is configured by means of codebook subset selection or codebook subsampling on rank-2 i2 e.g., indices in terms of parameters L1 and L2, with an assumption that the master codebook has rank-2 i2 indices corresponding to 1610: (L1, L2) = (4,2). In this case, the master codebook for i2 comprises 24 rank-2 beam combinations, as shown in FIGURE 43 also, which are shown as a 8x3 beam combination grid where 8 corresponds to the number of legacy rank-2 beam pairs for the first dimension (L1 = 4, see TABLE 37) and 3 corresponds to the rank-2 beam pairs for the second dimension (L2 = 2, see TABLE 45).
In some embodiments, the 1st dim and the 2nd dim in the figure correspond to i2,1 and i2,2. The shaded (black) squares represent the rank-2 i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
The number of rank-2 i2 indices with the subset restriction depends on the beam grouping schemes. For example, for the beam grouping schemes with (L1, L2) = (4,1) and (2,2), it is 16, so 4 bits are needed to report i2, for each configured beam grouping scheme.
In one method, for both dimensions, a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)), so that the UE can restrict the rank-2 beam combinations as illustrated in FIGURE 43 16 In one example, the UE is configured a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)) in the higher-layer according to a configuration table. For (L1, L2) = (2,2), (2,1), and (1,2), there are multiple beam groups. In one option, one beam group out of multiple beam groups is explicitly configured. In another option, it is fixed to a default beam group.
In another method, a UE can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes in FIGURE 43.
In another method, a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes in FIGURE 43.
In some embodiments, the beam grouping (or subset restriction) is applied based on the configured rank-2 beam pair type. For instance, the UE may be configured by the higher layer signaling about the rank-2 beam pair type according to TABLE 47.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000299
In some embodiments, the beam grouping (or subset restriction) is applied based on the dimension indicator I for different beams for the two layers. For instance, the UE is configured by the higher layer signaling about the dimension indicator I for different beams for the two layers according to TABLE 48, where I = {0} indicates the same beam for the two layers is configured in both dimensions.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000300
Rank 3-4 Codebook
TABLE 49 and TABLE 50 are used as a rank-3 and rank-4 master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein TABLE 45 is used for the beam pairs in the shorter dimension to construct the master codebook. In rank-3 codebook, the i2 indices 0 - 31 are identical to those in TABLE 40. In addition to those, i2 indices 32 - 47 are corresponding to the different beam pair (0,1) in the shorter dimension (L2 = 2). The rank-4 table is constructed similarly.
Note that the number of i2 indices in the rank-3 master codebook in TABLE 49 is 48, and that in the rank-4 master codebook is 24.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000301
Rank-3 and Rank-4 Beam Groupings
FIGURE 44 illustrates beam grouping schemes 4400 for rank-3 and rank-4 i2 according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiments shown in FIGURE 44 are for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Depending on the values of parameters L1 and L2, subset restriction on rank-3 and rank-4 i2 indices can be differently applied. In the embodiments, a beam grouping scheme is configured by means of illustrates codebook subset selection or codebook subsampling on rank-3 and rank-4 i2 e.g., indices in terms of parameters L1 and L2, with an assumption that the master codebook has rank-3 and rank-4 i2 indices corresponding to 1710: (L1, L2) = (4,2). The shaded and pattern squares represent the i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group.
The number of rank 3-4 i2 indices with the subset restriction depends on the beam grouping schemes. For example, for the beam grouping schemes with (L1, L2) = (4,1) and (2,2), the number of rank-3 (rank-4) i2 indices with the subset restriction is 16 (8), so 4 bits (3 bits) are needed to report i2, for each configured beam grouping scheme.
In one method, for both dimensions, a UE can be configured with pair of numbers of beams in a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)), so that the UE can restrict the rank-3 and rank-4 beam combinations as illustrated in FIGURE 44. In one example, the UE is configured a beam group (i.e., (L1, L2)) in the higher-layer according to a configuration table. For (L1, L2) = (2,2), (1,2) and (2,1), there are multiple beam combinations. In one option, one beam combination out of multiple beam combinations is explicitly configured. In another option, it is fixed to a default beam combination.
In another method, a UE can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes in FIGURE 44 17.
In another method, a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected among a subset of beam grouping schemes in FIGURE 44.
Rank 5-8 Codebook
In some embodiments, TABLE 51 is used as a rank-r (r layer) where r = {5,6,7,8} master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein TABLE 45 is used for the beam pairs in the shorter dimension to construct the master codebook and the corresponding rank 5 precoder is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000302
the corresponding rank 6 precoder is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000303
the corresponding rank 7 precoder is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000304
and the corresponding rank 8 precoder is:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000305
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000306
Note that the master rank 5 - 8 codebook tables are constructed based on the legacy (Rel12 8-Tx) rank 5 - 8 orthogonal beams for the longer dimension (L1 = 4). The i2 indices 0 - 1 are identical to those in TABLE 43. In addition to those, i2 = 2 corresponds to the different beam pair (0,1) in the shorter dimension (L2 = 2).
In one method, the codebook parameters in the first dimension are legacy parameters, i.e., s1 = 2, p1 = 1, and i1,1 = 0 - 3 for rank 5 - 7 and i1,1 = 0 for rank 8. In another method, they are non-legacy parameters. The parameters for the second dimension, s2 and p2, in this table can be selected, e.g., according to TABLE 13, and it is assumed that (L1 , L2) = (4, 2). Also, i1,2=0,1,...,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000307
-1.
The number of rank 5 - 8 i2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 43 is 3, so 2 bit is needed to report i2 based on this master codebook.
Embodiments on Rank 5 - 8 beam groupings
FIGURE 45 illustrates a beam combination 4500 to construct ranks 5 - 8 master codebooks according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 45 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Utilizing the legacy 3 (4) orthogonal beams (0,8,16) ((0,8,16,24)) for ranks 5-6 (rank 7-8) for the longer dimension (L1 = 4) and for each beam pair in TABLE 45 for the shorter dimension (L2 = 2), an 3x3 (4x3) grid can be considered for the two dimensions as shown (black squares) in FIGURE 45.
FIGURE 46 illustrates beam grouping schemes for ranks 5-8 i2 indices according to the embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 46 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
Depending on the values of parameters L1 and L2, subset restriction on rank 5-8 i2 indices can be applied. In the embodiments, a beam grouping scheme is configured by means of codebook subset selection or codebook subsampling on rank 5-8 i2 e.g., indices in terms of parameters L1 and L2, with an assumption that the master codebook has rank 5-8 i2 indices corresponding to 1910 (rank 5-6) and 1950 (rank 7-8): (L1, L2) = (4,2). The shaded (black) squares represent the rank 5-8 i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that form a beam group and are obtained after subset restriction and the white squares represent the indices that are not included in the beam group. As shown,1920 and 1960 correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (4,1) is configured, 1930 and 1970 correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (2,2) is configured and beam pair (0,0) and (1,1) are used alternatively in the shorter dimension, and 1940 and 1980 correspond to a codebook subset (or a beam group) when (L1, L2) = (2,2) is configured and beam pair (0,0) and (0,1) are used alternatively in the shorter dimension. Note that no i2 indication is needed whenever subset restriction is configured.
Alternate Codebook Design
In order to keep the size of the master codebook in powers of 2, we propose an alternate codebook design alternative in which: only important beam grouping schemes are considered; and the number of redundant codewords in the master codebook (codewords that are not configured by any of the beam grouping schemes) is minimized.
In this alternate design, the rank-1 codebook is the same as in TABLE 35. So, we focus on rank 2-8 codebook design. Also, in the following, we focus on beam grouping schemes with (L1, L2) = (4,1) and (2,2). However, the design is applicable to other beam grouping schemes including (L1, L2) = (1,2), (2,1), and (1,1).
Rank 2 Codebook
In some embodiments, TABLE 52 is used to construct the beam pairs in the shorter dimension (L2 = 2) for the rank-2 codebook.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000308
In some embodiments, TABLE 54 is used as a rank-2 (2 layer) master codebook that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein TABLE 37 and TABLE 52, respectively are used for the beam pairs in the longer and the shorter dimension to construct the master rank-2 codebook. The details of the i2 indices to beam pair mappings are shown in TABLE53.
According to the TABLE 53, the i2 indices 0 - 15 are identical to those in TABLE 38 which correspond to Rel12 8-Tx rank-2 beam pairs for the longer dimension and the beam pair index 0 (TABLE 52) for the shorter dimension. The i2 indices 16 - 27 correspond to Rel12 8-Tx rank-2 beam pair indices {0,1,3,4,5,7} (TABLE 37) for the longer dimension and the beam pair index 1 (TABLE 52) for the shorter dimension. And there are three options, i.e., Option 1 - 3, for the i2 indices 28 - 31, which are shown in the table. The details of the three options are provided below.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000309
Note that the number of rank-2 i2 indices in the master codebook in TABLE 54 is 32.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000310
Rank-2 Beam Grouping Scheme
FIGURE 47 illustrates beam grouping scheme or codebook subset selection 4700 on rank-2 i2 indices in terms of parameters L1 and L2, with an assumption that the master codebook has rank-2 i2 indices corresponding to (L1, L2) = (4,2) and TABLE 54, according to the embodiments of the present disclosure.
In this case, the master codebook for i2 comprises 16 rank-2 beam pair combinations, as shown in FIGURE 47, which are shown as a shaded and pattern squares in the 2D grid (x,y) , where the first component x corresponds to the legacy Rel12 8-Tx based rank-2 beam pairs for the first dimension (L1 = 4, see TABLE 37) and the second component y corresponds to the beam pairs for the second dimension (L2 = 2) according to TABLE 52. The shaded and pattern squares represent the rank-2 i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that are obtained based on the beam grouping scheme or after subset restriction from the master codebook and the white squares represent the indices that are redundant and are hence not included in the master codebook.
As shown, there are three beam grouping schemes (or CSS methods), namely beam group 0 - beam group 2. Beam group 0 corresponds to a codebook subset (or beam group) when (L1, L2) = (4,1) is configured and the selected beam combination comprises of 8 combinations located at{(x,0)} where x is according to TABLE 37.
Beam group 1 corresponds to a codebook subset (or beam group) when (L1, L2) = (2,2) is configured and depending on how rank-2 beam combinations are formed out of the fours beams {(x,y)} where x,y = {0,1}, there are following three options for Beam group 1:
Option 1: In this option, the four beams (0,0), (0,1), (1,1), and (1,0) are first numbered as 0,1,2, and 3 respectively, and then legacy 8-Tx rank-2 beam pairs are formed according to TABLE 37;
Option 2: In this option, the legacy 2-Tx rank-2 beam pairs (0,0), (1,1), and (0,1) are considered in one dimension d = {1,2}, and the same beam pair (0,0) and (1,1) are considered in the other dimension; and
Option 3: In this option, 2 diagonal beam pairs corresponding to {(0,0),(1,1)} and {(0,1),(1,0)}, and 2 horizontal (or first or longer dimension) beam pairs corresponding to {(0,0),(0,1)} and {(1,0),(1,1)} beam pairs are considered.
Beam group 2 corresponds to a codebook subset (or beam group) when (L1, L2) = (2,2) is configured and the configured beam pairs follow the check (cross) pattern as shown in the figure.
The number of rank-2 i2 indices with the subset restriction according to three beam grouping scheme is 16, so 4 bits are needed to report i2 for the configured beam grouping scheme.
FIGURE 47 illstrates alternate rank 1 and rank 2 codebook designs (both rank 1 and rank 2 codebook size = 32) according to the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 47 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In one method, for both dimensions, a UE can be configured with the beam grouping scheme or CSS method (or a pair of numbers of beams in a beam group, i.e., (L1, L2)), so that the UE can restrict the rank-2 beam combinations as illustrated in FIGURE 47. In one example, the UE is configured a beam grouping scheme or CSS method in the higher-layer according to TABLE 55. For Beam group 1, either one of Option 1, Option 2, and Option 3 is explicitly configured or one of the three is a default option (for example Option 1).
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000311
In another method, a UE can be configured in the higher-layer (RRC) with a beam grouping scheme, selected from Beam group 0, Beam group 1 (Option 1), Beam group (Option 2), Beam group 1 (Option 3), and Beam group 2.
In another method, a UE can report a beam grouping scheme, selected from Beam group 0, Beam group 1 (Option 1), Beam group 1 (Option 2), Beam group 1 (Option 3), and Beam group 2.
In some embodiments, the master rank-2 codebook comprises of beam pairs corresponding to all of Beam group 0, Beam group 1 (Option 1), Beam group 1 (Option 2), Beam group 1 (Option 3), and Beam group 2. The corresponding rank-2 table is shown in TABLE 56. Note that in this mater codebook, the number of i2 indices is 36. In one method, one rank-2 beam group out of five beam groups can be configured to a UE using this table.
Similar master rank-2 tables for other beam grouping schemes according to some embodiments of this disclosure can be constructed similarly.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000312
In some embodiments, the master rank-2 codebook comprises of all the beam pairs described in TABLE 56, and it additionally comprises two more codewords with co-phase n = 2, 3. The corresponding rank-2 table is shown in TABLE 57. Note that in this mater codebook, the number of i2 indices is 38. In one method, one rank-2 beam group out of five beam groups can be configured to a UE using this table.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000313
Ranks 3-4 Codebook
FIGURE 48 illustrates rank 3 and rank 4 beam grouping schemes 4800 according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 48 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
A beam grouping scheme (or CSS method) is configured from Beam group 0 ? Beam group 2. And, the master rank 3 and rank 4 codebooks are as in TABLE 40 and TABLE 41, respectively.
Note that four orthogonal beam pairs {(0,8),(2,10),(4,12),(6,14)} in the first dimension are shown as shaded and pattern squares. The four beams in three beam groups are numbered 0 - 3 as shown in the figure, and the corresponding 2D beam pairs are tabulated TABLE 58.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000314
Rank 3-4 codebooks corresponding to the case in which we have different beams (0,1) and (1,0) in the shorter dimension, according to TABLE 45 and TABLE 52 can be constructed similarly.
Ranks 5-8 Codebook
FIGURE 49 illustrates ranks 5 to 8 beam grouping schemes 4900 according to the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 49 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
The beam grouping scheme (or CSS method) is configured from Beam group 0 and Beam group 2.
The master rank 5 - 8 codebooks are as in TABLE 43, Note that four orthogonal beam pairs {(0,8),(2,10),(4,12),(6,14)} in the first dimension are shown as shaded and pattern squares. The four beams in Beam group 0 and Beam group 2 are numbered 0 - 3 as shown in the figure, and the corresponding 2D beam pairs are tabulated in TABLE 59.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000315
Rank 5-8 codebooks corresponding to the case in which we have different beams (0,1) and (1,0) in the shorter dimension, according to TABLE 45 and TABLE 52 can be constructed similarly.
Bitmap to Configure a Beam Grouping Scheme Or CSS
In some embodiments, the beam grouping scheme for each rank 1-8 codebooks may be configured based on a bitmap, where the length of the bitmap equals to number of beam combinations (for a given rank) in the master codebook.
For example, the beam grouping scheme for rank-1 codebook may be configured based on a bitmap of length K1 x K2 (product of number of rank-1 beams in two dimensions), where Kd with d = 1,2 corresponds to the number of beams in dimension d of the rank-1 master beam group (L1,L2). For instance, for the master beam group (L1,L2) = (4,2), K1 = L1 and K2 = L2, so the length of bitmap is 8.
For example, the beam grouping scheme for rank-2 codebook may be configured based on a bitmap of length K1 x K2 (product of number of rank-2 beam pairs in two dimensions), where Kd with d = 1,2 corresponds to the number of beam pairs in dimension d of the rank-2 master beam group (L1,L2). For instance, for the master beam group (L1,L2) = (4,2), K1 = 8 (TABLE 37) and K2 = 4 (TABLE 52), so the length of bitmap is 32.
The length of bitmaps for rank 3-8 codebooks can be determined similarly.
An example of bitmaps for rank-1 and rank-2 beam grouping schemes in FIGURE 47 is shown in TABLE 60 and TABLE 61, respectively.
In TABLE 60, the first column corresponds to the beam indices for 1st and 2nd dimensions in (L1,L2) = (4,2) grid of the master codebook. The bitmaps corresponding to the three beam groups, Beam group 0 - Beam group 2 are shown in columns 2 - 4, where 1 indicates the corresponding beam in the 2D grid is included in the beam group and 0 indicates otherwise.
In TABLE 61, the first column corresponds to the rank-2 beam pair indices for 1st and 2nd dimensions in (L1,L2) = (4,2) grid of the master codebook. For example, the beam pair indices (1,0) indicates the beam pair 1 from TABLE 37 for the 1st dimension, and the beam pair 0 from the TABLE 52 for the 2nd dimension. The bitmaps corresponding to the five rank-2 beam groups, Beam group 0, Beam group 1 (Option 1), Beam group 1 (Option 2), Beam group 1 (Option 3), and Beam group 2 are shown in columns 2 - 6, where 1 indicates the corresponding beam pair indices in the 2D grid is included in the rank-2 beam group and 0 indicates otherwise.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000316
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000317
In one alternative, bitmap for each rank can be configured separately. In another alternative, a composite bitmap obtained by concatenating bitmaps for all ranks are formed and bitmaps for all ranks are configured jointly using the composite bitmap. In yet another alternative, multiple composite bitmaps are formed based on ranks and they are configured separately. For example, rank 1-2 form one composite bitmap, rank 3-4 form another composite bitmap, and rank 5-8 form another composite bitmap, and at least one of the three composite bitmaps is configured.
In one method, the bitmap can be configured using RRC.
In some embodiments, the number of 1’s in the bitmap is fixed to a value for each rank 1-8.
For example, the number of 1’s may be fixed to 4 for rank-1, and 8 for rank 2-4, and so on. In this example, the configured beam grouping schemes correspond to (L1,L2) = (4,1) or (2,2).
In another example, the number of 1’s may be fixed to 2 for rank-1, and 4 for rank 2-4, and so on. In this example, the configured beam grouping schemes correspond to (L1,L2) = (2,1) or (1,2).
In another example, the number of 1’s may be fixed to 1 for rank 1-4. In this example, the configured beam grouping scheme corresponds to (L1,L2) = (1,1).
In some embodiments, the number of 1’s in the bitmap is fixed to multiple values for each rank 1-8.
For example, the number of 1’s may be fixed to {1,4} for rank-1, and {1,8} for rank 2-4. In this example, the configured beam grouping schemes correspond to (L1,L2) = (4,1) or (2,2) or (1,1).
In some embodiments, for each rank, a beam grouping scheme can be configured (e.g., based on a bitmap or a beam grouping scheme indicator).
When a bitmap based approach is used, the length of the bitmap equals to the number of i'2 indices in the master codebook.
Examples of beam grouping scheme indication for rank-1 and rank-2 i'2 are shown in TABLE 62 and TABLE 63, respectively based upon TABLE 35 and TABLE 56.
TABLE 62 shows selected rank-1 i'2 indices determined dependent upon a selected beam group. The selected indices can also be represented by a bitmap.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000318
In some embodiments, beam group 3 may be selected. If the beam group 3 is selected, s1= s2 =1, and p1= p2 = 1, i'2 shown in TABLE 35 may be expressed as below:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000319
In another embodiments, beam group 1 may be selected. If the beam group 1 is selected, s1= s2 =2, and p1= p2 = 1, i'2 shown in TABLE 35 may be expressed as below. i2 may be newly numbered after sorting i'2 in ascending order.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000320
In other embodiments, beam group 2 may be selected. If the beam group 2 is selected, s1= s2 =2, and p1= p2 = 1, i'2 shown in TABLE 35 may be expressed as below. i2 may be newly numbered after sorting i'2 in ascending order. In the following description, x=i1,1, y=i1,2 or x=i1,2, y=i1,1.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000321
In other embodiments, beam group 0 may be selected. If the beam group 0 is selected, s1= s2 =2, and p1= p2 = 1, i'2 shown in TABLE 35 may be expressed as below. i2 may be newly numbered after sorting i'2 in ascending order.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000322
As described in TABLE 35, the codebook is determined by an equation:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000323
.
TABLE 63 shows selected rank-2 i'2 indices determined dependent upon a selected beam group. Beam group 1 options 1, 2 and 3 are constructed according to FIUGRE 47.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000324
Mapping i' 2 indices into the Second PMI indices i 2
In some embodiments, referring to TABLE 56, if beam group 3 is selected, TABLE 54 may be used. Referring to TABLE 54, TABLE 38 may be used. Referring to TABLE 56, if beam group 3 is selected and s1= s2 =1, i'2 shown in TABLE 56 may be expressed as below.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000325
may be determined by an equation:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000326
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000327
In another embodiments, beam group 1 (option 2) may be selected. Referring to TABLE 56, if beam group 1 (option 2) is selected, s1= s2 =2, and p1= p2 = 1, i'2 shown in TABLE 56 may be expressed as i2. i2 may be newly numbered from i'2. i2 may be expressed as below.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000328
In other embodiments, beam group 0 may be selected. Referring to TABLE 56, if beam group 1 (option 2) is selected, s1= s2 =2, and p1= p2 = 1, i'2 shown in TABLE 56 may be expressed as i2 . TABLE 38 may be used because indices 1 to 15 are used. i2 may be expressed as below. As described below, x=i1,1, y=i1,2 or x=i1,2, y=i1,1.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000329
In some embodiments, the reported second PMI i2 by the UE spans 0-A, and are one-to-one mapped sequentially from the selected i'2 indices (e.g., according to TABLE 61 for rank-1). Example values for A = 1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63.
For example, when beam group 1 is selected for rank-1, the selected i'2 indices 0-7 and 16-23 are sequentially one-to-one mapped to i2 indices 0-15.
Fixed Codebooks
In some embodiments, the codebooks for some of or all ranks 1-8 for each of 12, 16 and 32 antenna ports are fixed and no configuration is necessary.
In one example, such fixed codebooks are the master codebooks of rank 1-8 according to some embodiments of this disclosure.
In another example, such fixed codebooks are the codebooks of rank 1-8 corresponding to the beam grouping (L1,L2) = (4,1) according to some embodiments of this disclosure.
In another example, such fixed codebooks are the codebooks of rank 1-8 corresponding to the beam grouping (L1,L2) = (2,2) according to some embodiments of this disclosure.
In some embodiments, the codebooks for some of or all ranks 1-8 for each of 12, 16 and 32 antenna ports are fixed depending on the antenna port configurations. For example, for 16 ports, codebooks are fixed for depending on (N1, N2) = (1,8), (4,2), (2,4), and (8,1). The exact codebook is configured by configuring the antenna port configuration (N1, N2).
Note that the embodiments of this disclosure is applicable to other beam group sizes of the master codebook including (L1,L2) = (4,4).
Rank Specific Beam Grouping Scheme
In some embodiments, the configured beam grouping scheme is the same for all ranks 1-8. For example, the configured beam grouping scheme corresponds to one of multiple options for (L1,L2) = (2,2) for all ranks 1-8, where the beam grouping scheme is according to some embodiments of this disclosure.
In some embodiments, the configured beam grouping scheme is specific to each rank 1-8. For example, for rank-1, the configured beam grouping scheme may correspond to (L1,L2) = (4,1), and for rank-2, it may correspond to one of multiple options for (L1,L2) = (2,2), and so on, where the beam grouping scheme is according to some embodiments of this disclosure.
In some embodiments, the configured beam grouping scheme is specific to a fixed subset of ranks from 1-8. For example, for rank1-2, the configured beam grouping scheme may correspond to (L1,L2) = (2,2), and for rank 3-8, it may correspond to (L1,L2) = (4,1), where the beam grouping scheme is according to some embodiments of this disclosure.
In some embodiments, there are multiple different alternatives to decide whether the beam grouping scheme is the same for all ranks, specific to each rank, or specific to a subset of ranks. In one alternative, the beam grouping schemes for different ranks are pre-determined. In another alternative, this decision is made at eNB. In another alternative, UE indicates this to the eNB.
Separate Master Codebook for Config A and B in FIGURE 5 (without transpose antenna port indexing)
If the antenna port configuration is explicitly configured, and different (master) codebook is configured depending on the configured antenna port, then we may have the following alternatives for codebook design.
Alternative 1: one codebook for both N1 ≥ N2 (config A) and N1 < N2 (config B) for symmetric antenna port layouts
This alternative is applicable to antenna port configurations (N1,N2) that are symmetric in the sense that the corresponding antenna port layouts are transpose of one another. For example (N1,N2) = (2,4) and (4,2) for 16 port and (N1,N2) = (2,3) and (3,2) as shown in FIGURES 5A to 5B. For such antenna port layouts, we may have the same codebook table, representing the different pre-coding vectors and matrices in the two layouts.
In some embodiments, there is one (master) codebook table for both of the symmetric antenna port configurations. In this case, we can represent the two symmetric port configurations as N1 ≥ N2 (config A) and N1 < N2 (config B), for example config A and B in FIGURES 5A to 5B. However, depending on the configured antenna port configuration, the pre-coder is derived differently.
In one method, the order in which the Kronecker product is performed is dependent on the configuration. For instance, for the configuration in which N1 ≥ N2, the UE derives the rank-1 pre-coder as
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000330
, and for the configuration in which N1 < N2, the UE derives the rank-1 pre-coder as
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000331
. Note that the orders in which the Kronecker product is performed in the two expressions are opposite in order to ensure that the dimensions of the two vectors to the left and to the right of Kronecker operator are the same in the two expressions.
In this way, various embodiments according to TABLE 35 an TABLE 62, codebook index may be changed according to N1 associated antenna ports in a first dimension and N2 associated antenna ports in a second dimension. For example, if N1 ≥ N2, x=i1,1, y=i1,2 , and if N1 < N2, x=i1,2, y=i1,1.
Also note that in some embodiments the KP expressions can be swapped for the two configurations:, i.e., if N1 ≥ N2 we have
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000332
; and if N1 < N2, we have
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000333
. This applies to all the embodiments for other ranks as well.
For example, assuming antenna port numbering 2 for a 16 port configuration, we have:
(N1,N2) = (4,2) and,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000334
and
(N1,N2) = (2,4) and,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000335
.
Similarly, for 12 port configuration, we have:
(N1,N2) = (3,2) and,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000336
and
(N1,N2) = (2,3) and,
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000337
.
The embodiment is applicable to the antenna port numbering 1, where (N1,N2) = (2,4) for config A and for (N1,N2) = (4,2) for config B.
Note that even though
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000338
expression is different in two configurations, the master rank-1 codebook table such as TABLE 35 can be used for both.
For rank-2, the pre-coding matrix is given by
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000339
for N1 ≥ N2 (config A), and it is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000340
for N1 < N2 (config B). The expressions for rank 3-8 for the two configurations can be expression similarly. Similar to rank-1, for rank 2-8 also, the master rank 2-8 codebooks in this case remain the same as mentioned earlier in this disclosure.
In addition, the beam grouping schemes or (L1,L2) configurations or codebook subset selection according to some embodiments of this disclosure are applicable straightforwardly to this case once we have the master table for each of antenna port configurations.
In another method, if the oversampling factor in the longer and shorter dimensions of the two symmetric port configurations are the same, then the pre-coder for one of the symmetric port configuration is derived from that for the other symmetric port configuration by applying a fixed mapping on the elements of the pre-coding vector. In one method, for the configuration in which N1 ≥ N2 (config A), the UE derives the rank-1 pre-coder as
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000341
, and for the configuration in which N1 < N2 (config B), the UE derives the rank-1 pre-coder as
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000342
, where the mapping function is defined as
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000343
Note that here the assumption is that O1 and O2 in case of N1 ≥ N2 is the same as O2 and O1 in case of N1 < N2, respectively. In one example, for (N1,N2) = (4,2) with (O1,O2) = (8,16),
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000344
and
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000345
, hence
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000346
; and for (N1,N2) = (2,4) with (O1,O2) = (16,8),
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000347
hence
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000348
, which can be obtained by applying the permutation
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000349
on the components of
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000350
.
In an alternate method, the pre-coder for N1 ≥ N2 can be derived by applying a similar fixed mapping on the pre-coder for N1 < N2 case.
For rank 2-8, the mapping can be constructed similarly.
Alternative 2: different codebooks for different antenna port configurations
In this alternative, we have different codebook for different antenna port configurations. In the following, we assume that the first dimension is for the horizontal and the second dimension is for the vertical. The codebook design below, however, is applicable to the other case in which the first dimension is for the vertical and the second dimension is for the horizontal, or any other form of antenna port layouts including one-dimensional. As before, we continue to assume antenna port numbering 2 in the codebook tables. The codebook tables for antenna port numbering 1 can be constructed similarly.
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with two different rank-1 master codebooks for the two antenna port configurations, N1 ≥ N2 (config A) and N1 < N2 (config B). If N1 ≥ N2, then the master rank-1 codebook is according to TABLE 35, and N1 < N2, then the master rank-1 codebook is given by TABLE 64, that the beam grouping in the two codebooks constitute 4 beams in the longer dimension (4 ports) and 2 beams in shorter dimension.
There are multiple alternatives for the rest of codebook parameters for the two codebooks. In one alternative, the codebook parameters are the same in the two codebooks, i.e., O1, O2, s1, s2, p1, and p2 are the same. In another alternative, they are different. In yet another alternative, a subset of them is the same, and another subset is different. For example, O1 and O2 are different, but s1, s2, p1, and p2 are the same.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000351
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with two different rank-2 master codebooks for the two antenna port configurations, N1 ≥ N2 (config A) and N1 < N2 (config B). If N1 ≥ N2, then the master rank-2 codebook is according to TABLE 56 and N1 < N2, then the master rank-2 codebook is given by TABLE 65. Note that the beam grouping in the two codebooks constitute 4 beams in the longer dimension (4 ports) and 2 beams in shorter dimension. TABLE 35 is constructed simular to TABLE 56 except that the Rel 12 8-Tx rank-2 beam pairs are considered for the 4 beams in vertical dimension (2nd dimension).
Similar to rank-1 case, there are multiple alternatives for the rest of codebook parameters for the two codebooks. In one alternative, the codebook parameters are the same in the two codebooks, i.e., O1, O2, s1, s2, p1, and p2 are the same. In another alternative, they are different. In yet another alternative, a subset of them is the same, and another subset is different. For example, O1 and O2 are different, but s1, s2, p1, and p2 are the same.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000352
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with two different rank-3 and rank-4 master codebooks for the two antenna port configurations, N1 ≥ N2 (config A) and N1 < N2 (config B). If N1 ≥ N2, then the master rank-3 and rank-4 codebooks are according to TABLE 40 and TABLE 41, respectively, and if N1 < N2, then they are given TABLE 8 and TABLE 67, respectively, wherein the corresponding rank 3 precoder is either
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000353
or
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000354
, and the corresponding rank 4 precoder is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000355
.
Note that the beam grouping in the two codebooks constitute 4 beams in the longer dimension (4 ports) and 2 beams in shorter dimension. TABLE 66 and TABLE 67 respectively are constructed simular to TABLE 40 and TABLE 41 except that the four orthogonal beam pairs {(0,8),(2,10),(4,12),(6,14)} are considered in the vertical dimension (2nd dimension).
In the longer dimension (4 ports), the codebook parameters are legacy Rel12 8-Tx parameters, i.e., if N1 ≥ N2, then s1 = 8, p1 = 1, and i1,1 = 0 - 3, and if N1 < N2, then s2 = 8, p2 = 1, and i1,2 = 0 - 3. There are multiple alternatives for the parameters in the other dimension of the two codebooks. In one alternative, they are the same in both codebooks, i.e., O2, s2, and p2 in case of N1 ≥ N2 are the same as O1, s1, and p1 in case of N1 < N2. In another alternative, they are different. In yet another alternative, a subset of them is the same, and another subset is different. For example, O1 in case of N1 ≥ N2 and O2 in case of N1 < N2 are different, but other parameters are the same.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000356
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000357
Rank 3-4 codebooks corresponding to the case in which we have different beams (0,1) and (1,0) in the shorter dimension (2 ports), according to TABLE 45 and TABLE 52 can be constructed similarly.
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with two different rank 5-8 master codebooks for the two antenna port configurations, N1 ≥ N2 (config A) and N1 < N2 (config B). If N1 ≥ N2, then the master rank 5-8 codebooks are according to TABLE 43, and if N1 < N2, then they are given by TABLE 68, wherein the corresponding rank-5 precoder is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000358
the corresponding rank-6 precoder is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000359
the corresponding rank-7 precoder is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000360
and the corresponding rank-8 precoder is
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000361
Note that the beam grouping in the two codebooks constitute 4 orthogonal beams {0,8,16,24} in the longer dimension (4 ports) and 2 beams in shorter dimension. TABLE 68 is constructed simular to TABLE 43 except that the four orthogonal beams {0,8,16,24} are considered in the vertical dimension (2nd dimension).
In the longer dimension (4 ports), the codebook parameters are legacy Rel12 8-Tx parameters, i.e., if N1 ≥ N2, then s1 = 2, p1 = 1, and i1,1 = 0 - 3 for rank 5 - 7 and i1,1 = 0 for rank 8, and if N1 < N2, then s2 = 2, p2 = 1, and i1,2 = 0 - 3 for rank 5 - 7 and i1,2 = 0 for rank 8. There are multiple alternatives for the parameters in the other dimension of the two codebooks. In one alternative, they are the same in both codebooks, i.e., O2, s2, and p2 in case of N1 ≥ N2 are the same as O1, s1, and p1 in case of N1 < N2. In another alternative, they are different. In yet another alternative, a subset of them is the same, and another subset is different. For example, O1 in case of N1 ≥ N2 and O2 in case of N1 < N2 are different, but other parameters are the same.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000362
Rank 5-8 codebooks corresponding to the case in which we have different beams (0,1) and (1,0) in the shorter dimension (2 ports), according to TABLE 45 and TABLE 52 can be constructed similarly.
In some embodiment, the configuration about the selected beam group or codebook subset selection from the master codebook of rank 1-8 in this different master codebook case is according to some embodiments of this disclosure, wherein the configuration of the beam group is dependent upon the configured (N1, N2). For example, for N1 ≥ N2, the beam groups are as shown in FIGURE 47 and for N1 < N2, they are the transpose of the corresponding beam groups in FIGURE 47.
Concrete Example
FD-MIMO codebook of rank 1-8 is configured with N1, N2,O1,O2 via RRC signaling, where the configured values of N1 and N2 are from the set {1,2,3,4,6,8} such that 2N1 ·N2 ={8,12,16}, and the configured values of O1 and O2 may be from the set {2,4,8}. A codebook for 8, 12, or 16 antenna ports is suggested in the present disclosure. The codebook has a double codebook structure: W = W1W2, according to some embodiments of this disclosure. In particular, W1=
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000363
where
mi is the index for Xi;
X1 is a N1xL1 matrix with L1 column vectors being an O1x oversampled DFT vector of length N1:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000364
and
X2 is a N2xL2 matrix with L2 column vectors being an O2x oversampled DFT vector of length N2:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000365
For rank 1-4 W2, the codebook table has 4×2 beams, i.e., (L1, L2) = (4,2) where a 1st dimension is the longer dimension and a 2nd dimension is the shorter dimension of the configured antenna port layout or (N1,N2). A subset of codewords from the codebook table is selected for W2 or i2 to be reported.
The number of i2 hypotheses after CSS will be 16 for rank 1, 2 and 3, which is smaller than the total number of i2 indices in the rank-specific codebook table. The CSS allows non-adjacent 2D beam sampling.
The choice of subset is configured via RRC in the form on CSS configuration, which determines a 2D beam group used in W1. For each (N1,N2) pair, the indicated 2D beam group satisfies the condition L L2 ≤ 4. For example, the indicated beam group is one of the following four:
BG0: a beam group related to either (L1, L2) = (4,1) or (1,4), wherein the 4 beams are along the longer dimension. An example of such a beam group is 820 in FGIURE 35;
BG1: a beam group corresponding to (L1, L2) = (2,2), which corresponds to a square. A few examples of such a beam group are 830a, 830b, 830c in FIGURE 35;
BG2: a beam group corresponding to (L1, L2) = (2,2), which corresponds to non-adjacent 2D beams or checkerboard. A few examples of such a beam group are 830d, 380e, 830f in FIGURE 35; and
BG3: a beam group corresponding to (L1, L2) = (1,1), which corresponds to one beam selection. An example of such a beam group is 860 in FIGURE 35.
Note that the W2 payload size varies according to 2D beam group configuration. For example, BG0 - BG2, the payload is 4 bits for rank-1 i2 reporting, and it is 2 bits for BG3 assuming QPSK alphabet {1,j,-1,-j} for co-phase reporting, and no beam selection information is necessary here.
Furthermore, the beam groups (BG) can be classified into two sets:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000366
As described below, W may be represented as W1 and W2. W1 and W2 may correspond to Wide-Band (WB), and Sub-Band (SB). A first payload for W1 can be expressed in ceil(log2(N1O1/2)) + ceil(log2(N2O2/2)) bits. The first payload may be expressed in i1,1, and i1,2. i1,1 can be expressed in ceil(log2(N1O1/2)). i1,2 can be expressed in ceil(log2(N2O2/2)). The ceil function provides an integer which is bigger than an input and is the nearest to the input. For example, ceil(3.6) is four. In other words, i1,1 can be expressed as
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000367
. i1,2 can be expressed as
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000368
. These expressions can be applied to cases in which a rank value is 1or 2, for s1= s2 =2 or s1= s2 =1.
In some embodiments, a UE can be configured with either Set 1 or Set 2 by RRC. In one example, only one BG is included in Set 1. In another example, the UE is also configured with a BG if Set 1 is configured. Then, the UE will report PMI, of which the payload size is determined dependent upon which set is configured; in addition the UE will use the configured BG to select a beam and corresponding precoder.
In some embodiments, a UE can be configured with a BG out of BG0, BG1, BG2, and BG3 by RRC. The UE determines the set to which the configured BG belongs, which in turn determines the payload size for PMI reporting. The UE then uses the configured BG to select a beam and corresponding precoder.
In some embodiments, a UE is configured to select and report one of Set 1 and Set 2 to eNB, which uses the selected set to configure PMI codebook. In one example, only one BG is included in Set 1. In another example, UE also selects a BG if it reports Set 1. In other words, the UE may comprise a configuration parameter to be configured with a codebook. The configuration parameter may indicate one of a plurality of BGs. The configuration parameter may indicate a pattern of combination for at least one beam. The pattern of the combination can be expressed by dividing a first dimension (L1) and a second dimension (L2).
In some embodiments, a UE is configured to select and report one of BG0, BG1, BG2, and BG3 to eNB, which uses the selected BG to configure PMI codebook.
More Rank-2 Codebook Designs: Design 1
FIGURE 50 illustrates the master rank-2 codebook 5000 designed according to Design 1 according to the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 50 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
The codebook comprises of rank-2 beam pairs corresponding to four rank-2 configurations (or beam grouping schemes):
Config 1 is for (L1,L2) = (1,1) configuration and the selected rank-2 beam pair is located at{(00,00)};
Config 2 is for (L1,L2) = (2,2) - square configuration, which corresponds to 4 Type 1 pairs {(00,00), (00,11), (11,00), (11,11)}, 2 Type 2-1 pairs {(01,00), (01,11)}, and 2 Type 2-3 pairs {(01,01), (01,10)};
Config 3 is for (L1,L2) = (2,2) - checker board configuration, which corresponds to 4 Type 1 pairs {(00,00), (00,22), (11,11), (11,33)}, 3 Type 2-1 pairs {(03,00), (12,11), (13,11)}, and 1 Type 2-3 pairs {(01,01)}; and
Config 4 is for (L1,L2) = (4,1) configuration and the selected rank-2 beam pairs correspond to 8 pairs located at{(x,00)} where x is according to TABLE 37.
In total, the codebook comprises of 16 rank-2 beam pair combinations, which are shown as a shaded and pattern squares in the 2D grid (x,y) , where the first component x corresponds to the legacy Rel12 8-Tx based rank-2 beam pairs for the first dimension (L1 = 4, see TABLE 37) and the second component y corresponds to the beam pairs for the second dimension (L2 = 2) according to TABLE 52. The shaded and pattern squares represent the rank-2 i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that are selected based at least one of the four configurations (or beam grouping schemes) and the white squares represent the indices that are not selected by any configurations.
TABLE 69 shows the rank-2 (2 layer) master codebook according to this design that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein TABLE 37 and TABLE 52, respectively are used for the beam pairs in the longer and the shorter dimension to construct the master rank-2 codebook. Note that the number of rank-2 i2 indices in this master codebook is 32.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000369
More Rank-2 Codebook Designs: Design 2
FIGURE 51 illustrates the master rank-2 codebook 5100 designed according to Design 2 according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 51 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
The codebook comprises of rank-2 beam pairs corresponding to four rank-2 configurations (or beam grouping schemes):
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000370
In total, the codebook comprises of 16 rank-2 beam pair combinations for each of Option 0 and Option 1, which are shown as a shaded and pattern squares in the 2D grid (x,y), where the first component x corresponds to the legacy Rel12 8-Tx based rank-2 beam pairs for the first dimension (L1 = 4, see TABLE 37) and the second component y corresponds to the beam pairs for the second dimension (L2 = 2) according to TABLE 52. The shaded and pattern squares represent the rank-2 i2 (or i2,1 and i2,2) indices that are selected based at least one of the four configurations (or beam grouping schemes) and the white squares represent the indices that are not selected by any configurations.
TABLE 70 shows the rank-2 (2 layer) master codebook according to this design that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein TABLE 37 and TABLE 52, respectively are used for the beam pairs in the longer and the shorter dimension to construct the master rank-2 codebook. Note that the number of rank-2 i2 indices in this master codebook is 32.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000371
FIGURE 52 illustrates beam grouping options 5200 for Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 51 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with one of Option 0 and Option 1 if it is configured with Config 2.
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with Config 2 with the pre-determined option, for example Option 0.
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with one of Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4. Depending on the configuration, the UE selects i'2 indices in TABLE 69 (or TABLE 70) according to TABLE 71 and sequentially maps them to 0 - 1 for Config 1, and 0 - 15 for Config 2-4 in order to report i2 PMI.
In one method, a UE uses the beam group spacing parameters (s1,s2) according to TABLE 71 depending on the configuration.
In one method, a UE uses the following values in TABLE 69 (or TABLE 70): i1,1=0,1,…,O1N1/s1-1; i1,2=0,1,…,O2N2/s2-1; and p1=1 and p2=1.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000372
Referring to TABLE 71, if the configuration parameter is 1, (s1,s2) may be (1,1). If the configuration parameter is 2, 3, or 4, (s1,s2) may be (2,2).
In some embodiments, a UE reports a preferred configuration, selected from Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4.
In some embodiments, the master rank-2 codebook is designed by selecting at least one rank-2 beam pair option from multiple options shown in FIGURE 52 for each of Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4.
In one method, from the designed master codebook, a UE is configured with one configuration from the Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4 that comprise the master codebook according to some embodiments of this disclosure.
In another method, from the designed master codebook, a UE reports one configuration from the Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4 that comprise the master codebook according to some embodiment.
Rank 2 Codebook Design based on Nested Property with Rank 1 Codebook
FIGURE 53 illustrates rank 2 beam pairs 5300 based on nested property with rank 1 beams according to embodiments of the present disclosure. The embodiment shown in FIGURE 51 is for illustration only. Other embodiments could be used without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.
In some embodiments, the master rank-2 codebook is designed with the nested property with the rank-1 codebook in the sense that the rank-2 beam pairs for the two layers are formed using the beams in the rank-1 codebook (TABLE 35).
In some embodiments, the nested master rank-2 codebook is designed as shown in FIGURE 53. The codebook comprises of rank-2 beam pairs corresponding to four configurations (or beam grouping schemes), namely Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4, where:
Config 1 is for (L1,L2) = (1,1) configuration;
Config 2 is for (L1,L2) = (2,2) - square configuration;
Config 3 is for (L1,L2) = (2,2) - checker board configuration; and
Config 4 is for (L1,L2) = (4,1) configuration.
Note that Config 1 corresponds to a single beam located at (0,0), and hence the corresponding rank-2 beam pair is (00,00).
Config 2-4 correspond to beam grouping schemes with 4 beams. As shown in the leftmost column of FIGURE 53, for each of Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4, the four rank-1 beams are numbered as 0, 1, 2, and 3. From these numbered rank-1 beams, eight rank-2 beam pairs are constructed as follows:
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000373
In the middle column of FIGURE 53, the corresponding eight rank-2 beam pairs are shown as grey and three different pattern squares, and they are also numbered as 0 - 7. Note that for Config 2, three different rank-2 beam pairs are shown corresponding to Options 0-2. TABLE 72 tabulates the rank-1 beams and rank-2 beam pairs according to this construction for the four configurations.
The rightmost column of FIGURE 53 shows all rank-2 beam pairs according to this construction. Note that there are 18 (17) rank-2 beam pairs for Options 0-1 (Option 2) that are numbered as 0 - 17 (16) in the figure. The shaded and pattern squares represent the rank-2 beam pairs that are selected based at least one of the four configurations (or beam grouping schemes) and the white squares represent the indices that are not selected by any configurations.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000374
TABLE 73 shows the nested rank-2 (2 layer) master codebook according to this design that can be used for any of Q = 12, 16 and 32 antenna configurations, wherein TABLE 72 is used for the nested rank-2 beam pairs. Note that the number of rank-2 i'2 indices in this master codebook is 36 for Options 0-1 and is 34 for Option 2.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000375
In some embodiments, a UE is configured with one of Config 1, Config 2, Config 3, and Config 4. Depending on the configuration, the UE selects i'2 indices in TABLE 73 according to TABLE 74 and sequentially maps them to 0 - 1 for Config 1, and 0 - 15 for Config 2-4 in order to report i2 PMI.
In one method, a UE uses the beam group spacing parameters (s1,s2) according to TABLE 74 depending on the configuration.
In one method, a UE uses the following values in TABLE 73: i1,1=0,1,…,O1N1/s1-1; i1,2=0,1,…,O2N2/s2-1; and p1=1 and p2=1.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000376
According to TABLE 74, Config 3 may be selected. If the config 3 is selected, , s1= s2 =2, and , p1= p2 = 1, i'2 shown in TABLE 73 may be expressed in i2 described as below. It is determined that x=i1,1, y=i1,2 or x=i1,2, y=i1,1.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000377
In some embodiments, the nested master rank-2 beam pairs are obtained by selecting eight out of ten rank-2 beam pairs shown in TABLE 75. Note that beam pair indices 0-7 correspond to legacy Rel10 rank-2 beam pairs, and beam pair indices 8-9 correspond to non-Rel10 rank-2 beam pairs.
Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000378
The corresponding nested master rank-2 codebook can be constructed similar to the previous and other embodiments of this disclosure.
To aid the Patent Office and any readers of any patent issued on this application in interpreting the claims appended hereto, applicants wish to note that they do not intend any of the appended claims or claim elements to invoke 35 U.S.C. § 112(f) unless the words “means for” or “step for” are explicitly used in the particular claim. Use of any other term, including without limitation “mechanism,” “module,” “device,” “unit,” “component,” “element,” “member,” “apparatus,” “machine,” “system,” “processor,” or “controller,” within a claim is understood by the applicants to refer to structures known to those skilled in the relevant art and is not intended to invoke 35 U.S.C. § 112(f).
Methods stated in claims and/or specifications according to various embodiments may be implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software.
In the implementation of software, a computer-readable storage medium for storing one or more programs (software modules) may be provided. The one or more programs stored in the computer-readable storage medium may be configured for execution by one or more processors within the electronic device. The at least one program may include instructions that cause the electronic device to perform the methods according to various embodiments of the present disclosure as defined by the appended claims and/or disclosed herein.
The programs (software modules or software) may be stored in non-volatile memories including a random access memory and a flash memory, a Read Only Memory (ROM), an Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM), a magnetic disc storage device, a Compact Disc-ROM (CD-ROM), Digital Versatile Discs (DVDs), or other type optical storage devices, or a magnetic cassette. Alternatively, any combination of some or all of the may form a memory in which the program is stored. Further, a plurality of such memories may be included in the electronic device.
In addition, the programs may be stored in an attachable storage device which may access the electronic device through communication networks such as the Internet, Intranet, Local Area Network (LAN), Wide LAN (WLAN), and Storage Area Network (SAN) or a combination thereof. Such a storage device may access the electronic device via an external port. Further, a separate storage device on the communication network may access a portable electronic device.
In the above-described detailed embodiments of the present disclosure, a component included in the present disclosure is expressed in the singular or the plural according to a presented detailed embodiment. However, the singular or plural expressions are selected to be suitable for proposed situations for convenience of description, and the present disclosure is not limited to the singular or plural elements. An element expressed in a plural form may be configured in singular, or an element expressed in a singular form may be configured in plural.
Although specific exemplary embodiments have been described in the detailed description of the present disclosure, various change and modifications may be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the present disclosure. Therefore, the scope of the present disclosure should not be defined as being limited to the embodiments, but should be defined by the appended claims and equivalents thereof.

Claims (15)

  1. A method for operating a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system, the method comprising:
    receiving, from a base station, downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook; and
    transmitting, to the base station, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters,
    wherein the parameters comprises:
    a first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension;
    a second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension;
    a third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension; and
    a fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
  2. The method of claim 1,
    wherein the at least one PMI for the codebook is determined based on a first value, a second value, and a third value,
    wherein the first value is one of whole numbers which are smaller than a product of the first parameter and the third parameter,
    wherein the second value is one of whole numbers which are smaller than a product of the second parameter and the fourth parameter, and
    wherein the third value is one of four phases which are orthogonal each other.
  3. The method of claim 2,
    wherein the codebook is determined by a equation:
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000379
    where l represents the first value, m represents the second value, and n is one of zero, one, two, and three, P represents a number of channel state information - reference signal (CSI-RS) ports,
    vl,m is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000380
    , where N1 represents the first parameter, and O1 represents the third parameter,
    um is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000381
    where N2 represents the second parameter, and O2 represents the fourth parameter, and
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000382
    is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000383
    =
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000384
    .
  4. The method of claim 2,
    wherein the codebook is a codebook for two layers,
    wherein the codebook is determined by a equation:
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000385
    , where l , and l' represents the first value, m , and m' represents the second value, n is zero or one, P represents a number of channel state information - reference signal (CSI-RS) ports,
    vl,m is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000386
    , where N1 represents the first parameter, and O1 represents the third parameter,
    um is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000387
    where N2 represents the second parameter, and O2 represents the fourth parameter, and
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000388
    is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000389
    =
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000390
    .
  5. The method of claim 1,
    wherein the parameters further comprises:
    a fifth parameter indicating interval between leading beam of first beam group and leading beam of second beam group which is adjacent to the first beam group in the first dimension; and
    a sixth parameter between leading beam of first beam group and leading beam of second beam group which is adjacent to the first beam group in the second dimension,
    wherein the at least one PMI for the codebook is determined based on a first value, a second value, and a third value,
    wherein the first value is one of whole numbers which are smaller than a product of the first parameter and the third parameter divided by the fifth number,
    wherein the second value is one of whole numbers which are smaller than a product of the second parameter and the fourth parameter divided by the s number, and
    wherein the third value is one of four phases which are orthogonal each other.
  6. The method of claim 5,
    wherein a value of the fifth parameter is two,
    wherein a value of the sixth parameter is two, and
    wherein the codebook is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000391
    or
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000392
    or
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000393
    where if the first parameter is bigger than or equal to the second parameter, x=i1,1, y=i1,2 , if the first parameter is smaller than the second parameter, x=i1,2, y=i1,1, i1,1 represents the first value, i1,2 represents the second value, i2 is associated with the third value,
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000394
    where l represents the first value, m represents the second value, and n is one of zero, one, two, and three, P represents a number of channel state information - reference signal (CSI-RS) ports,
    vl,m is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000395
    , where N1 represents the first parameter, and O1 represents the third parameter,
    um is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000396
    where N2 represents the second parameter, and O2 represents the fourth parameter, and
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000397
    is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000398
    =
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000399
    .
  7. The method of claim 5,
    wherein a value of the fifth parameter is two,
    wherein a value of the sixth parameter is two,
    wherein the codebook is a codebook for two layers, and
    wherein the codebook is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000400
    or
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000401
    or
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000402
    where if the first parameter is bigger than or equal to the second parameter, x=i1,1, y=i1,2 , if the first parameter is smaller than the second parameter, x=i1,2, y=i1,1 , i1,1 represents the first value, i1,2 represents the second value, i2 is associated with the third value,
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000403
    is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000404
    , P is a number of channel state information - reference signal (CSI-RS) ports,
    vl,m is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000405
    , where N1 represents the first parameter, and O1 represents the third parameter,
    um is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000406
    where N2 represents the second parameter, and O2 represents the fourth parameter, and
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000407
    is determined by
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000408
    =
    Figure PCTKR2016004566-appb-I000409
    .
  8. The method of claim 1,
    wherein the parameters further comprises a configuration parameter for indicating a configuration for the codebook,
    wherein the configuration parameter indicates a pattern of a combination for at least one beam.
  9. The method of claim 8,
    wherein the configuration parameter indicates the pattern of the combination for the at least one beam by dividing the first dimension and the second dimension, and
    wherein the configuration parameter in the first dimension and the second dimension is four and one, one and four, or two and two.
  10. The method of claim 1,
    wherein the first parameter and the second parameter is respectively eight and one, two and two, two and three, three and two, two and four, or four and two,
    wherein the third parameter is two, four, or eight, and
    wherein the fourth parameter is two, four, or eight.
  11. A method of operating a base station, the method comprising:
    transmitting, to a user equipment (UE), downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook; and
    receiving, from the UE, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters,
    wherein the parameters comprises:
    a first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension;
    a second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension;
    a third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension; and
    a fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
  12. The method of claim 11, wherein the base station configured to impelement one of claims 2 to 10.
  13. An apparatus of a user equipment (UE) in a wireless communication system, the apparatus comprising:
    a transceiver; and
    a controller operatively coupled with transceiver,
    wherein the controller is configured to:
    receive, from a base station, downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook; and
    transmit, to the base station, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters,
    wherein the parameters comprises:
    a first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension;
    a second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension;
    a third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension; and
    a fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
  14. An apparatus of a base station, the apparatus comprising:
    a storage unit configured to store information associated with precoding; and
    a transceiver,
    wherein the transceiver is configured to:
    transmit, to a user equipment (UE), downlink signals for indicating parameters for a codebook; and
    receive, from the UE, information for at least one precoding matrix indicator (PMI) for the codebook determined based on the parameters,
    wherein the parameters comprises:
    a first parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a first dimension;
    a second parameter associated with a number of antenna ports for a second dimension;
    a third parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the first dimension; and
    a fourth parameter associated with an oversampling rate for beams in the second dimension.
  15. The apparatus of claim 13 or claim 14, the apparatus configured to impelement one of claims 2 to 10.
PCT/KR2016/004566 2015-04-29 2016-04-29 Apparatus and method for using codebook wireless communication system WO2016175623A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201680032837.1A CN107690756B (en) 2015-04-29 2016-04-29 Apparatus and method for wireless communication system using codebook
EP16786809.0A EP3289696A4 (en) 2015-04-29 2016-04-29 Apparatus and method for using codebook wireless communication system

Applications Claiming Priority (26)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201562154525P 2015-04-29 2015-04-29
US62/154,525 2015-04-29
US201562187585P 2015-07-01 2015-07-01
US62/187,585 2015-07-01
US201562194404P 2015-07-20 2015-07-20
US62/194,404 2015-07-20
US201562198408P 2015-07-29 2015-07-29
US62/198,408 2015-07-29
US201562199637P 2015-07-31 2015-07-31
US62/199,637 2015-07-31
US201562201926P 2015-08-06 2015-08-06
US62/201,926 2015-08-06
US201562213988P 2015-09-03 2015-09-03
US62/213,988 2015-09-03
US201562216610P 2015-09-10 2015-09-10
US62/216,610 2015-09-10
US201562222102P 2015-09-22 2015-09-22
US62/222,102 2015-09-22
US201562239587P 2015-10-09 2015-10-09
US62/239,587 2015-10-09
US201562241512P 2015-10-14 2015-10-14
US62/241,512 2015-10-14
US14/995,126 US9806781B2 (en) 2015-04-29 2016-01-13 Codebook design and structure for advanced wireless communication systems
US14/995,126 2016-01-13
KR1020160052732A KR102468684B1 (en) 2015-04-29 2016-04-29 Apparatus and method for using codebook in wireless communication system
KR10-2016-0052732 2016-04-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016175623A1 true WO2016175623A1 (en) 2016-11-03

Family

ID=57199160

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2016/004566 WO2016175623A1 (en) 2015-04-29 2016-04-29 Apparatus and method for using codebook wireless communication system

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2016175623A1 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108270472A (en) * 2016-12-30 2018-07-10 华为技术有限公司 Method, base station and the terminal of code book is configured
EP3406033A4 (en) * 2016-02-24 2019-03-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for channel state information (csi) reporting
WO2019047782A1 (en) * 2017-09-08 2019-03-14 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 Channel state information feedback and resource allocation methods, terminal, base station and device
WO2019052486A1 (en) * 2017-09-12 2019-03-21 Mediatek Inc. Codebook-based uplink transmission in wireless communications
KR20190085527A (en) * 2016-12-09 2019-07-18 삼성전자주식회사 Codebook for CSI reporting in an improved wireless communication system
US10411868B2 (en) 2016-02-24 2019-09-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for channel state information (CSI) reporting
CN110463072A (en) * 2017-01-31 2019-11-15 Lg电子株式会社 The method and apparatus of reporting channel status information in a wireless communication system
CN110574304A (en) * 2017-04-25 2019-12-13 三星电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for high level CSI reporting in advanced wireless communication systems

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130308715A1 (en) * 2012-05-18 2013-11-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for channel state information codeword construction for a cellular wireless communication system
US20140098689A1 (en) 2012-09-28 2014-04-10 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Wireless communication using multi-dimensional antenna configuration
WO2014126992A2 (en) * 2013-02-12 2014-08-21 Texas Instruments Incorporated 4tx codebook enhancement in lte
US20140301492A1 (en) * 2013-03-08 2014-10-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Precoding matrix codebook design for advanced wireless communications systems

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130308715A1 (en) * 2012-05-18 2013-11-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Apparatus and method for channel state information codeword construction for a cellular wireless communication system
US20140098689A1 (en) 2012-09-28 2014-04-10 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Wireless communication using multi-dimensional antenna configuration
WO2014126992A2 (en) * 2013-02-12 2014-08-21 Texas Instruments Incorporated 4tx codebook enhancement in lte
US20140301492A1 (en) * 2013-03-08 2014-10-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Precoding matrix codebook design for advanced wireless communications systems

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ERICSSON: "2D Codebook with KP structure and associated feedback", R1-151926, 3GPP TSG-RAN WG1 #80BIS, 11 April 2015 (2015-04-11), Belgrade, Serbia, XP050950228 *
HUAWEI ET AL.: "Codebook enhancements for EBF/FD-MIMO", R1-151285, 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #80BIS, 10 April 2015 (2015-04-10), Belgrade, Serbia, XP050949738 *
See also references of EP3289696A4

Cited By (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10411868B2 (en) 2016-02-24 2019-09-10 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for channel state information (CSI) reporting
EP3406033A4 (en) * 2016-02-24 2019-03-13 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for channel state information (csi) reporting
KR102404935B1 (en) 2016-12-09 2022-06-07 삼성전자 주식회사 Codebook for CSI Reporting in Improved Wireless Communication System
EP3533156A4 (en) * 2016-12-09 2019-10-30 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Codebook for csi reporting in advanced wireless communication system
KR20190085527A (en) * 2016-12-09 2019-07-18 삼성전자주식회사 Codebook for CSI reporting in an improved wireless communication system
CN108270472A (en) * 2016-12-30 2018-07-10 华为技术有限公司 Method, base station and the terminal of code book is configured
US10965356B2 (en) 2017-01-31 2021-03-30 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for reporting channel state information in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
EP3579449A4 (en) * 2017-01-31 2020-06-17 LG Electronics Inc. -1- Method for reporting channel state information in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
CN110463072A (en) * 2017-01-31 2019-11-15 Lg电子株式会社 The method and apparatus of reporting channel status information in a wireless communication system
CN110463072B (en) * 2017-01-31 2023-09-26 Lg 电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for reporting channel state information in wireless communication system
KR20200005572A (en) * 2017-04-25 2020-01-15 삼성전자주식회사 Higher Rank CSI Reporting Method and Apparatus in Advanced Wireless Communication System
EP3602834A4 (en) * 2017-04-25 2020-04-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for higher rank csi reporting in advanced wireless communication systems
US11336351B2 (en) 2017-04-25 2022-05-17 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for higher rank CSI reporting in advanced wireless communication systems
KR102453737B1 (en) 2017-04-25 2022-10-12 삼성전자 주식회사 Higher rank CSI reporting method and apparatus in advanced wireless communication system
CN110574304A (en) * 2017-04-25 2019-12-13 三星电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for high level CSI reporting in advanced wireless communication systems
CN110574304B (en) * 2017-04-25 2023-10-13 三星电子株式会社 Method and apparatus for high-level CSI reporting in advanced wireless communication systems
WO2019047782A1 (en) * 2017-09-08 2019-03-14 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 Channel state information feedback and resource allocation methods, terminal, base station and device
US10567051B2 (en) 2017-09-12 2020-02-18 Mediatek Inc. Codebook-based uplink transmission in wireless communications
CN110024302A (en) * 2017-09-12 2019-07-16 联发科技股份有限公司 Codebook-based uplink transmission in wireless communication
TWI710228B (en) * 2017-09-12 2020-11-11 聯發科技股份有限公司 Odebook-based uplink transmission in wireless communications
WO2019052486A1 (en) * 2017-09-12 2019-03-21 Mediatek Inc. Codebook-based uplink transmission in wireless communications
CN110024302B (en) * 2017-09-12 2021-10-22 联发科技股份有限公司 Wireless communication method and related wireless communication device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3289696A1 (en) Apparatus and method for using codebook wireless communication system
WO2018117738A1 (en) Uplink mimo codebook for advanced wireless communication systems
WO2016175623A1 (en) Apparatus and method for using codebook wireless communication system
AU2016324556B2 (en) Signaling methods and apparatus for advanced MIMO communication systems
WO2016204591A1 (en) Advanced beamforming and feedback methods for mimo wireless communication systems
WO2016080743A1 (en) Methods to calculate linear combination pre-coders for mimo wireless communication systems
WO2016195335A1 (en) Method and apparatus for operating mimo measurement reference signals and feedback
WO2016148464A1 (en) Advanced feedback and reference signal transmissions for mimo wireless communication systems
WO2021066497A1 (en) Method and apparatus for multiplexing partial csi
WO2016133376A1 (en) Channel-state-information reference signals
WO2021137658A1 (en) Method and apparatus for reciprocity based csi-rs transmission and reception
WO2017146533A1 (en) Method and apparatus for channel state information (csi) reporting
WO2022045804A1 (en) Method and apparatus for csi reporting based on a codebook
WO2022131879A1 (en) High-resolution codebook for distributed mimo transmission
WO2023146266A1 (en) Method and apparatus for compression-based csi reporting
WO2022075826A1 (en) Method and apparatus for configuring parameters of a port selection codebook
WO2023149736A1 (en) Method and apparatus for channel quality reporting cross-reference to related application and claim of priority
WO2017069580A1 (en) Precoder codebook for advanced wireless communication systems
EP3365982A1 (en) Precoder codebook for advanced wireless communication systems
WO2023200218A1 (en) Trp subset selection and reporting
WO2017048049A1 (en) Signaling methods and apparatus for advanced mimo communication systems
WO2023003401A1 (en) Method and apparatus for compression-based csi reporting
WO2022265376A1 (en) Method and apparatus for csi reporting
WO2022169212A1 (en) Method and apparatus for csi reporting in a wireless communication system
WO2023219430A1 (en) Csi codebook for multi-transmission reception point operation in a wireless communication system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16786809

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2016786809

Country of ref document: EP